User Guide

FastReporter 3
Post-Processing Software

www.EXFO.com
 Copyright Information

Copyright Information
Copyright © 2007–2023 EXFO Inc. All rights reserved. No part of this
publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system or transmitted
in any form, be it electronically, mechanically, or by any other means such
as photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written
permission of EXFO Inc.(EXFO).
Information provided by EXFO is believed to be accurate and reliable.
However, no responsibility is assumed by EXFO for its use nor for any
infringements of patents or other rights of third parties that may result from
its use. No license is granted by implication or otherwise under any patent
rights of EXFO.
EXFO’s Commerce And Government Entities (CAGE) code under the North
Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) is 0L8C3.
The information contained in this publication is subject to change without
notice.
Trademarks
EXFO’s trademarks have been identified as such. However, the presence
or absence of such identification does not affect the legal status of any
trademark.
Where applicable, the Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered
trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by
EXFO Inc. is under license. Other third party trademarks and trade names
are those of their respective owners.
Units of Measurement
Units of measurement in this publication conform to SI standards and
practices.
Patents
The exhaustive list of patents is available at EXFO.com/patent.

Version: 26.0.1.1

Post-Processing Software ii
 Contents

Contents

Copyright Information ............................................................................................................ii

1 Introducing FastReporter 3 ......................................................................... 1
Available Features ...................................................................................................................1
Conventions ............................................................................................................................7
2 Getting Started with FastReporter 3 .......................................................... 9
Installing and Uninstalling FastReporter 3 on a PC ...............................................................10
Using the Software Customization Wizard ...........................................................................12
Starting FastReporter 3 .........................................................................................................17
Activating the FastReporter 3 Software Options for TestFlow account users ........................23
Working in Disconnected Mode ............................................................................................24
Checking for Updates ...........................................................................................................24
Customizing the Main Window ............................................................................................26
Working with Two Monitors
(Only for PC) ....................................................................................................................29
Selecting Items From Lists and Menus ..................................................................................30
Changing FastReporter 3 Options .........................................................................................31
3 Working with Projects (Plus Mode) ........................................................... 43
Managing Projects ................................................................................................................43
Managing Project Templates ................................................................................................50
Changing File Direction .........................................................................................................54
Matching Files ......................................................................................................................55
Setting Auto Refresh in a Specific Folder ..............................................................................65
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode) ..............................................................................67
Changing the Main Measurement ......................................................................................102
Setting a Reference Measurement ......................................................................................103
4 Using Cloud Applications ......................................................................... 105
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect ...........................................................................110

Post-Processing Software iv
Contents

5 Working with OTDR Files ..........................................................................133

Changing OTDR Settings .....................................................................................................138
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode) ................................................................................158
Managing the OTDR Event Table View ................................................................................163
Setting the OTDR Graphic Display Options .........................................................................169
Viewing Section Length for the Linear View .......................................................................170
Using the Zoom Functions ..................................................................................................171
Managing Markers .............................................................................................................174
Setting and Applying OTDR/OTDR Bidir Reference as Template (Plus Mode) .......................184
Analyzing Measurements ....................................................................................................188
Using the Failed Items Filter ................................................................................................190
Displaying Statistics for Measurements ..............................................................................191
Setting Span Positions with Absolute Lengths ....................................................................192
Setting the IOR Value by Distance ......................................................................................194
Changing the Fiber Core Size (Plus Mode) ..........................................................................195
Reverting to File Test Settings .............................................................................................197
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode) ..................................................................198
Creating Batch Documentation ...........................................................................................207
Saving an OTDR File in a New File Format ...........................................................................208
Modifying Space Between Traces on the Graph ..................................................................209

v FastReporter 3
 Contents

6 Working with iOLM files .......................................................................... 211

Accepted File Formats .........................................................................................................211
Understanding the Link View ..............................................................................................211
Managing Multiple Measurements .....................................................................................215
Selecting Element Alignment Type ......................................................................................217
Modifying Tolerance and Bidirectional Settings ..................................................................219
Modifying iOLM Thresholds ................................................................................................222
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode) ................................................................................238
Modifying iOLM Result Settings (Plus Mode) ......................................................................243
Modifying the Splitter Ratio Information ............................................................................246
Modifying Identifier Labels (Plus Mode) ..............................................................................247
Changing Fiber Core Size (Plus Mode) ................................................................................248
Changing the iOLM Fiber Type ............................................................................................249
Changing the Number of Connections in the Link Definition ..............................................250
Changing the Number of Splices in the Link Definition .......................................................251
Managing Elements ............................................................................................................253
Customizing the Elements Table Tab ..................................................................................257
Analyzing Measurements (Plus Mode) ................................................................................277
Using the Failed Element Filter ...........................................................................................277
Generating (Exporting) a .sor File From iOLM Measurements (Plus Mode) .........................278
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode) .........................................................................282
Understanding Diagnostics .................................................................................................294
Viewing Power Meter Results .............................................................................................295
Managing Bidirectional iOLM Files ......................................................................................295
Viewing Elements Before A and After B ..............................................................................303
Viewing Section Length for Multiple Measurements ..........................................................304
Matching Link Elements Without a Reference .....................................................................304
Displaying Statistics for Matched Measurements ................................................................305
Using the FTTx Mode ..........................................................................................................307
7 Working with OFM Files ........................................................................... 310
Accepted File Formats .........................................................................................................310
Selecting Display Options for Elements Table .....................................................................311
Modifying Identifiers ..........................................................................................................312
Modifying Test Measurement Summary .............................................................................313
Configuring thresholds .......................................................................................................314
Viewing Element Properties ................................................................................................318
Using Custom Identifiers .....................................................................................................319

Post-Processing Software vi
Contents

8 Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files .....................................320

Accepted File Formats .........................................................................................................320
Modifying Unit Model and Serial Number ..........................................................................321
Showing or Hiding Threshold and Result Information ........................................................323
Applying a Configuration File to Selected FIP Files ..............................................................324
FIP Graphic Display Options ................................................................................................325
FIP-500 Results table information .......................................................................................331
Using Custom Identifiers ....................................................................................................334
Saving Legacy FIP Files in .cmax2 File Format ......................................................................335
Viewing Power Meter and OLTS Results ..............................................................................335
Viewing Geolocation Information .......................................................................................336
9 Working with OLTS Files ...........................................................................338
Accepted File Formats .........................................................................................................338
Changing OLTS Settings .....................................................................................................339
Applying a Configuration File to Selected OLTS Files ..........................................................344
Using Custom Identifiers ....................................................................................................345
Changing the OLTS Fiber Type ............................................................................................346
Changing the Number of Connections in the Link Definition ..............................................347
Changing the Number of Splices in the Link Definition ......................................................348
Changing the Loss Calculation Method for Bidirectional Files .............................................349
Setting Unidirectional Pass/Fail ...........................................................................................350
Setting FasTesT Pass/Fail Thresholds ...................................................................................354
Viewing FasTesT Results ......................................................................................................359
Viewing Link View Results ..................................................................................................360
Viewing Pass/Fail Status Information ..................................................................................362
Understanding Diagnostics .................................................................................................364
Merging OLTS Measurement Files .......................................................................................365
Creating 24 fiber test measurement ...................................................................................366
Creating a Virtual Bi-directional test measurement .............................................................370
10 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements ..................................................372
Accepted File Formats .........................................................................................................372
Changing OPM/PPM Settings ..............................................................................................374
Viewing Power Meter Results .............................................................................................377
Setting Thresholds for the OPM MF tests ............................................................................381
Viewing OPM MF Results ....................................................................................................387
Configuring Link Definitions ...............................................................................................389
Changing the Correction Factor (Plus Mode) ......................................................................390
Creating Configuration Files for the PPM-350D ..................................................................391
Creating 24 fiber test measurement ...................................................................................396

vii FastReporter 3
 Contents

11 Working with CD Files .............................................................................. 400

Accepted File Formats .........................................................................................................400
Changing CD Settings .........................................................................................................401
Changing CD Fiber Type .....................................................................................................406
Changing Analysis Range ....................................................................................................408
Changing the Fiber Length .................................................................................................409
Switching Between Curve Types .........................................................................................410
Showing the Zero-Dispersion Wavelength ..........................................................................411
12 Working with PMD Files ........................................................................... 412
Accepted File Formats .........................................................................................................412
Changing PMD Settings ......................................................................................................413
Changing Fiber Length .......................................................................................................416
Working with PMD Statistic Measurements ........................................................................417
13 Using Instruments
(For PC Only) 420
Viewing and Modifying the local test measurements .........................................................420
Updating the connected testing devices .............................................................................426
Managing the Pass/Fail Criteria (Threshold Management) file
(For FIP-500 only) ..........................................................................................................431
Sharing files with EXFO
(For FIP-500 only) ..........................................................................................................435
14 Generating Reports .................................................................................. 438
Generating Measurement or Summary Reports (Plus Mode) ..............................................439
Generating Individual Test Reports .....................................................................................444
Generating Application-Related Reports .............................................................................446
Importing and Exporting Templates ...................................................................................448
Creating and Modifying Report Templates .........................................................................453
Using Excel Report Templates .............................................................................................453
15 Report Samples ........................................................................................ 466
Bidirectional OTDR ..............................................................................................................467
OTDR ..................................................................................................................................468
Fiber Characterization .........................................................................................................469
Fiber Inspection Probe ........................................................................................................470
iOLM ...................................................................................................................................471
OTDR Advanced Cable (Excel Template) ..............................................................................472
iOLM + FIP (Excel Template) ...............................................................................................473
iOLM Bidirectional (Excel Template) ....................................................................................474
iOLM Advanced Cable Report (Excel Report) .......................................................................475
FIP-500 Multi Measurement Reports ...................................................................................476

Post-Processing Software viii

Contents

16 Using the Validator (Plus Mode) ..............................................................482

Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project ....................482
17 Viewing and Editing Measurements ........................................................494
Find and Replace ................................................................................................................498
Search by keyword .............................................................................................................501
Modifying Summary Information (Plus Mode) ....................................................................504
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements .......................................................................505
Using the Identifiers View ...................................................................................................514
18 Using FastReporter 3 Tools .......................................................................518
Setting a Reference File or Measurement (Plus Mode) ........................................................518
Automatically Documenting Measurement Files (Plus Mode) .............................................519
Using the Duplicated Measurements Tool (Plus Mode) .......................................................523
Using the Clipboard (Plus Mode) ........................................................................................525
19 FastReporter 3 Examples ..........................................................................530
Creating an OTDR Bidirectional Project ...............................................................................531
Creating a Project Template ................................................................................................532
Creating a Fiber Characterization Report ............................................................................535
20 Troubleshooting ........................................................................................540
Consulting the Online Help .................................................................................................540
Consulting Information About FastReporter 3 ....................................................................541
Contacting the Technical Support Group ............................................................................541
A Description of Event Types ......................................................................542
...........................................................................................................................................543
Span Start ..........................................................................................................................543
Span End ...........................................................................................................................543
Short Fibers .......................................................................................................................543
Continuous Fiber ...............................................................................................................544
End of Analysis ..................................................................................................................545
Non-Reflective Event ..........................................................................................................546
Reflective Event .................................................................................................................547
Positive Event ....................................................................................................................548
Launch Level ......................................................................................................................549
Fiber Section ......................................................................................................................550
Merged Event ....................................................................................................................551
Echo ..................................................................................................................................557
Reflective Event (Possible Echo) .........................................................................................558

ix FastReporter 3
 Contents

B Measuring Chromatic Dispersion: Theory .............................................. 560

Method Behind the Chromatic Dispersion Analyzer ............................................................560
Using Data Fits to Obtain Dispersion ..................................................................................561
Helping You Manage Chromatic Dispersion ........................................................................563
C Measuring Polarization Mode Dispersion: Theory ................................. 564
D Keyboard Shortcuts ................................................................................. 568
Index .............................................................................................................. 572

Post-Processing Software x
1 Introducing FastReporter 3
FastReporter 3 is an advanced management, analysis, and reporting tool for
many types of optical tests, including the following:
 optical loss
 optical return loss (ORL)
 optical time-domain refractometer (OTDR)
 polarization mode dispersion (PMD)
 chromatic dispersion (CD)
 optical and PON power meters (OPM/PPM)
 fiber inspection probe (FIP)
 intelligent optical link mapper (iOLM)
 optical fiber multimeter (OFM)

Note: Depending on the platform you are using, some test modes may not be
available.

Available Features
Depending on the plan you have purchased, you can access two
application levels: Basic, which has limited features, and Plus, which has
the features of the Basic version, plus includes fiber characterization
loopback, and the Validator. Depending on which version you are using,
the features in the table below are available or not.

Note: For clarity purposes, only the Plus plan is mentioned in this user
documentation, but the Enterprise and Ultimate TestFlow plans also allow
access to the Plus version features.

Note: A feature with an “*” mark indicates that the modification is allowed for
single measurements.

Post-Processing Software 1
 Introducing FastReporter 3
Available Features

The table below lists the features available for the Basic and Plus TestFlow
plans. If you are using a USB license, the Validator and TestFlow options are
not available. If you remove your USB key dongle, only the Basic mode
features are available.

Feature OTDR iOLM OFM OLTS FIP PPM CD PMD

Basic Version
Analyzing or reanalyzing measurements*   – – – – – –

Applying sorting to other windows        

Changing analysis range – – – – – –  –

Changing event marker position on existing  – – – – – – –

events
Changing fiber length – – – – – –  
Changing fiber type – – –  – –  –

Changing number of connections in link – – –  – – – –

definition
Changing number of splices in link definition – – –  – – – –

Changing graphic display options  – – –  – – –

Editing measurement identification and        

summary information*
Exporting file to other file format*  – – – – – – –

Generating reports using the application’s   – –  – – –

format
Managing OTDR events  – – – – – – –

Managing power meter results –   – – 

2 FastReporter 3
 Introducing FastReporter 3
Available Features

Feature OTDR iOLM OFM OLTS FIP PPM CD PMD

Matching link elements with and without –   – – – – –
reference
Merging measurement files – – –  – – – –

Retrieving marker position from file  – – – – – – –

Saving measurement files        

Setting FasTesT pass/fail thresholds – – –  – – – –

Setting FIP results table options – – – –  – – –

Setting FIP thresholds table options – – – –  – – –

Setting ORL pass/fail thresholds (singlemode – – –  – – – –

only)
Setting OTDR event table options  – – – – – – –

Setting spans position to modify the IOR  – – – – – – –

value*
Setting span positions with absolute length*  – – – – – – –

Toggling between curve types – – – – – –  –

Using custom identifiers – – –   – – –

Using zoom functions  – – – – – – –

Viewing failed measurements only   – – – – – –

Viewing FasTesT results – – –  – – – –

Viewing files in the Identifier tab

Viewing measurement information        
Viewing power meter result files – – –  – – – –

Post-Processing Software 3
 Introducing FastReporter 3
Available Features

Feature OTDR iOLM OFM OLTS FIP PPM CD PMD

Viewing thresholds     – – – –

Viewing and sorting files or measurements        

Working with multimode fibers –  – – – – – –

Working with PMD statistic measurements – – – – – – – 

4 FastReporter 3
 Introducing FastReporter 3
Available Features

Feature OTDR iOLM OFM OLTS FIP PPM CD PMD

Plus Version
Applying an OTDR reference as a template  – – – – – – –

Changing correction factor – – – – –  – –

Changing fiber core size*   – – – – – –

Changing main measurements  – – – – – – –

Changing identifier labels –   – – – – –

Changing iOLM thresholds –  – – – – – –

Changing settings   –  –   
Creating bidirectional files   – – – – – –

Creating configuration files –  – – –  – –

Creating unidirectional files from a  – – – – – – –

bidirectional file
Generating SOR file from iOLM measurement –  – – – – – –

Generating text file from measurement   – – – – – –

Managing iOLM elements –   – – – – –

Managing measurement files        

Managing projects and project templates        
Managing reports and report templates        
Matching files        
Performing loopback tests  – – – – – – –

Post-Processing Software 5
 Introducing FastReporter 3
Available Features

Feature OTDR iOLM OFM OLTS FIP PPM CD PMD

Setting launch fiber and receive fiber on –  – – – – – –
element*
Setting reference file or measurement        
Using Auto template mode   – – – – – –
Using clipboard        
Using EXFO Connect to manage files
Using the Validator for measurement and file   – –  – – –
compliance (not available for USB licenses)
Viewing and editing TestFlow job files and –  – –   – –
measurements (not available for USB
licenses)
Viewing files in FTTx mode –  – – – – – –

Viewing iOLM settings –  – – – – – –

Note: Files coming from older OTDR modules may not be compatible with the
64-bit version.

Note: OLTS file management is not available for FTB-1v2. Files earlier than those
coming from the MAX-900 series may not be compatible with the 64-bit
version.

Note: FTB-5800 files are not available for FTB-1v2.

Note: FTB-5500 files are not available for FTB-1v2 or compatible with the 64-bit
version.

6 FastReporter 3
 Introducing FastReporter 3
Conventions

Conventions
Before using the product described in this guide, you should understand
the following conventions:

WARNING
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
could result in death or serious injury. Do not proceed unless you
understand and meet the required conditions.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in minor or moderate injury. Do not proceed unless you
understand and meet the required conditions.

CAUTION
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided,
may result in component damage. Do not proceed unless you
understand and meet the required conditions.

IMPORTANT
Refers to information about this product you should not overlook.

Post-Processing Software 7
2 Getting Started with
FastReporter 3
If you are using FastReporter 3 on a platform, it is usually pre-installed on
your unit. If it is not already installed, you can install it yourself through
Update Manager. Refer to the Update Manager documentation for details.
If you are using FastReporter 3 on a computer, the latter needs to meet the
requirements, depending on which operation system you are using:

System Element Particulars

Processor Minimum 1 Ghz
OS Windows 10 and Windows 11
Internet Browser Microsoft Edge Browser (Chromium)
RAM  Minimum 1 GB for 32-Bit FastReporter
 Minimum 2 GB for 64-bit FastReporter
We recommend 4 GB for 64 bit FastReporter
Disk Space  Minimum 16 GB for 32-Bit FastReporter
 Minimum 20 GB for 64-Bit FastReporter

Other requirements Microsoft Office 2007 or later to open .xlsx files

Post-Processing Software 9
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Installing and Uninstalling FastReporter 3 on a PC

Installing and Uninstalling FastReporter 3 on a

PC
The installation wizard will guide you through the installation step by step.
The application is available in two versions:
 32-bit: Contains all test modes and file formats.
 64-bit: Allows you to process more measurements and reports, but
older files formats, such as power meter (FOT-930), CD, and PMD
(FTB-5500, FTB-5700 and FTB-5800) are not supported.You can let the
wizard install the complete package, or you can select a custom
installation if you want to skip installing the USB key management
system.
To install FastReporter 3:
1. Download the application from the EXFO website if you have not done
so already, then locate the setup.exe application and double-click on it
to start the process.

10 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Installing and Uninstalling FastReporter 3 on a PC

2. Agree the license agreement and then click Next to start the
installation.
3. Follow the on-screen instructions. Click Finish once the installation is
done.

Note: If you are installing the 64-bit version, the application may ask you to restart
your system.

To uninstall FastReporter 3:
Use the add/remove programs(Apps and Features) to uninstall
FastReporter 3

Note: The FastReporter 3 application is also available for the EXFO testing
devices. Use the Update Manager tool on the testing device to search and
install the latest FastReporter 3 application.

Post-Processing Software 11
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Using the Software Customization Wizard

Using the Software Customization Wizard

The Software Customization Wizard helps you to set the application
according to each user’s needs. You can change the following settings:
 Language
 Distance units

Note: The Software Customization Wizard is displayed only once when the
application is started by the current Windows user for the first time.

Note: At any time you can apply the default settings by clicking Cancel. To apply
the changes you have made, click Finish. To return to the previous page,
click Back.

To customize the FastReporter 3 application:

1. You will be notified that your usage data will be collected for product
improvement purpose. Select OK if you agree and allow this.

You can also deactivate this later if you do not want to provide the data
usage analysis. Refer, the How to deactivate the usage analytics permission
on page 16 to know how to deactivate this.
2. Select the required language and the distance unit that should appear
in the application. Select Finish after done.

12 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Using the Software Customization Wizard

Note: These settings can also be modified in the File > Options menu,.

Note: You can view the supported test types in the File > Support > About
FastReporter 3 menu.

Post-Processing Software 13
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Using the Software Customization Wizard

How to deactivate the usage analytics permission

You can deactivate the Usage Analytics permission if required which you
have allowed while installing FastReporter.
To deactivate the usage analytics permission:
1. Go to the File > Support, and then select the Analytics Data option.

2. On the Analytics Data window, clear the Collect Data checkbox and
then select OK. The permission will be revoked.

14 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Starting FastReporter 3

Starting FastReporter 3
Once installed, all you need to do is double-click the FastReporter 3
shortcut corresponding to the version you want to use.

Note: You can also access FastReporter 3 through the start menu of Windows,
under the EXFO folder. The access path differs depending on the operating
system you are using.

If you are using a perpetual license on a USB key, your application starts
with the options you have purchased. If you are using a TestFlow account,
you have several choices available.

Post-Processing Software 15
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Starting FastReporter 3

Log in FastReporter
You can access FastReporter using EXFO Exchange or TestFlow accounts.
You can also continue without any ID with limited features.

Note: Sign up/Sign in FastReporter using an free EXFO Exchange account to

access all FastReporter features without any restrictions.

The log in screen appears at the start of the application.

16 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Starting FastReporter 3

To Logging in to FastReporter with EXFO Exchange account

1. If you have not logged in the application and want to log in, click the
Login label on the title bar or click the Cloud tab, and then select the
Login icon.

2. You will be redirected to the Edge Browser. Enter your EXFO

EXCHANGE credentials to logging into the FastReporter.

3. Select Open, you should allow EXFO Exchange to redirect you to the
FastReporter app on your system.
You will be redirected to the FastReporter application.

Post-Processing Software 17
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Starting FastReporter 3

Note: Select the check box if you want to always allow this request. This provides
the permission to always direct you to the FastReporter app on your system
after logging in to the EXFO Exchange.

Note: Enter the name and the password of your choice if you do not have the
EXFO Exchange account and want to create one.

18 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Starting FastReporter 3

Log out FastReporter (EXFO Exchange account)

The FastReporter remembers your credentials. You do not need to relogin
for every session. However, if required, you can log out from the
FastReporter.

Note: Logging out from the FastReporter will not log you out from other
standalone or web applications using EXFO Exchange account.

Note: If there are unsaved changes to the project or project files, you will be
prompted to save them when you are logging out from the EXFO Exchange
account.

To log out from FastReporter (EXFO Exchange account):

Click the Cloud tab, and then click the Logout icon.

Post-Processing Software 19
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Starting FastReporter 3

Log out from TestFlow Account/Change

Organization/Start TestFlow in a Browser
You can Log out from the TestFlow, Start TestFlow in a Browser, or Switch
your organization account

Note: If there are unsaved changes to the project or project files, you will be
prompted to save them when you log out from the TestFlow account.

To log out from TestFlow account:

Click the Cloud tab, and then click the Logout icon.

You can shift to another Organization account or start TestFlow in a

browser if required. Refer the above image.

20 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Activating the FastReporter 3 Software Options for TestFlow account users

Activating the FastReporter 3 Software

Options for TestFlow account users
The software options access will depend on the plan you have purchased
and the way you use to connect to FastReporter 3. You can connect to your
application in the following ways:
 Using your TestFlow account credentials and connecting to the server
through the Internet.
 Using a USB dongle key that will allow you to use your purchased
options on several units or computer, but on one location at a time.

Note: The Validator is not available on the USB dongle keys. You need a TestFlow
plan to access this feature.

If you have not purchased a plan, or if your USB dongle key is not in place,
you will be in Basic mode, with limited actions available to you. Purchase a
plan, such as Plus, Enterprise or Ultimate, to activate additional features, or
use your valid USB dongle key to use your subscription license.
In the case of a subscription license, FastReporter 3, it will verify if a valid
dongle key is connected, and if so, will continue to validate the presence of
said key every 10 minutes. If no dongle key is installed, you will be only
able to access the Basic mode features.

Note: For more informations about the accounts and purchasing options, refer to
the TestFlow user documentation.

Post-Processing Software 21
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Working in Disconnected Mode

Working in Disconnected Mode

If you are connecting to FastReporter 3 through TestFlow, you are using an
Internet connection to validate your credentials and options. If the Internet
connection is cut for some reason (for example, if you are in a location
where Wi-Fi is not available), your credentials and options will be kept
active for a period of seven days.
When you reconnect to the Internet, FastReporter 3 will reconnect
automatically so that you can continue working using your plan. If you are
disconnected from the Internet for more than seven days, FastReporter 3
will revert to Basic mode until you can validate your credentials and plan
again.

Checking for Updates

Install the updates for your application to benefit from the latest features.
To check for updates and install them:
1. From the File ribbon tab, select Support, then Check for Updates.

22 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Checking for Updates

2. If a new version is available, you will notice a link to start the download
and installation process. Click on it to install the newest version of the
application.

Note: If you want to be notified when new versions are available, select the
corresponding option.

Post-Processing Software 23
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Customizing the Main Window

Customizing the Main Window

When you start FastReporter 3, the main window appears. In the graphics
area of the main window, the application displays the EXFO Web page with
information related to FastReporter 3.
You can access any other Web page by entering the URL in the address
bar; you can also select any other website as the default opening page.
For more information, see Changing FastReporter 3 Options on page 31.

Note: FastReporter 3 was meant to be operated to its full potential using a mouse
and keyboard. Therefore the instructions herein imply that both peripherals
are connected to your unit.

Note: The appearance of your application may differ from the illustrations in this
user documentation depending on the resolution and platform you are
using.

Ribbon tabs TestFlow account

and status info
Menu bar

Data graph
(available
for some
measurements
only)
Selection
tabs

Results

24 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Customizing the Main Window

This window can be customized. You can add or remove toolbars, resize
the panes as needed and move them around, or even auto-hide panes
when they are not in use and reopen them later for as needed.
To display or hide the ribbon:
Use the button in the top right corner of the window.

To display the various panes:

1. Select the Home tab.
2. Under Show/Hide Windows, select which panes you want to see.

To resize a pane:
Use the split bars enclosing the pane you want to resize.
To close a pane:
Click the X button in the upper right corner.
To auto-hide a pane or tab:
Click the vertical pushpin ( ) in the upper right corner of the pane.
To show the pane again, move the mouse pointer over the desired hidden
pane or tab. Select the tab containing its name.
To turn off the auto-hide feature, click the horizontal pushpin ( ).

Post-Processing Software 25
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Customizing the Main Window

To move a pane or tab:

1. Click and hold the selected pane title bar or tab to select it.
Anchor points indicate where the selected item can be moved.

2. Drag the item from its current location to the desired anchor point,
then release the mouse button.

26 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Working with Two Monitors (Only for PC)

Working with Two Monitors

(Only for PC)
If your computer is equipped with two monitors, you can use one of the
monitors to view the trace files, and the other monitor to view the results or
the tabs you work most with. For more information on setting two monitors
on your computer, refer to the instructions provided with your monitors,
computer and video card.
To move an item to the other monitor:
Drag the item and release it when it appears on the desktop of the
secondary monitor.
FastReporter 3 will remember the size and position of the window the next
time you start the application.
Another way of increasing workspace is to open Windows Explorer and
drag it onto the desktop of the secondary monitor. You can then use the
FastReporter 3 drag-and-drop feature to add measurement files to your
projects simply by dragging them into the main FastReporter 3 window and
releasing the mouse button.

Post-Processing Software 27
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Selecting Items From Lists and Menus

Selecting Items From Lists and Menus

When selecting items in a list or menu, you can in many cases use the Ctrl
and Shift keys on your keyboard to make multiple selections, as you would
in other Windows-based applications.
Also, the same command can often be performed from the ribbon,
keyboard shortcuts, or by right-clicking into the pane where you want to
perform an action. For readability reasons, the ribbon method is privileged
in the explanations in this user documentation.

You can find a list of the shortcuts in Keyboard Shortcuts on page 568.

28 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Changing FastReporter 3 Options

Changing FastReporter 3 Options

You can change the general options including the user interface language,
field of application and supported measurement types, or the display
options including date and time formats. You can also narrow down the
supported measurement types to simplify the user interface.

IMPORTANT
You cannot open files corresponding to a file type that you have not
selected as supported.

Post-Processing Software 29
Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Changing FastReporter 3 Options

To change the Project Settings

1. Select the File menu, then go to Options.
2. Select the required options.

3. Click Apply to save your change and continue configuring FastReporter

3 or OK to save your change and exit the window.

Note: You need to restart FastReporter if you change the working language.

30 FastReporter 3
 Getting Started with FastReporter 3
Changing FastReporter 3 Options

4. ITo revert to the default settings, click Default Settings, then OK to

apply the default settings and exit the window.

Post-Processing Software 31
3 Working with Projects (Plus
Mode)
Projects are the files that you require in your analysis or post-processing
activity. You can select one or many files, from different sources, and save
the project for later consultation.
You can also manage project templates, to help you quicken your work.

Managing Projects
Each time you start FastReporter 3, a project is created automatically using
the default project template. You can also create a new project from
scratch.
Once a project is created, you can add files to it, or remove them.
When you save a project in FastReporter 3, the project settings and
references to the files you added to the project are saved. When you open
the project file, the project settings you modified and the files you added
will still be part of the project file, unless you moved or renamed any of the
files. Any changes to the measurement files themselves, however, are not
saved in the project file.
To create a project from scratch:
1. In the File ribbon tab, select New, then Project.
2. In the list, click the template you want to use.

Post-Processing Software 43
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Projects

3. Click OK.
4. In the File ribbon tab, click Open, then select File.
5. Select the desired files to include in the project.
6. Click Open to add the files to the project.
7. On File ribbon tab, click Save, then Project.
8. Click the folder where you want to save the project file.
9. In the File name box, type a name for the project file.

Note: FastReporter 3 automatically adds the .prj extension to the file name when
you save the file.

10. Click Save.

To open an existing project:
1. On the File ribbon tab, click Open, then Project.
2. Select and open the folder where your project file is located.
3. Select the project file and click Open.

Note: If your project includes files that come from the EXFO Connect server, you
will be prompted to either check them out, or view them in read-only mode.
See Managing Files on page 119 for details.

44 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Projects

To save a project file:

On the File ribbon tab, click Save, then Project.
To save the project file and the measurement files in the project, click
Save All.

Note: If your project includes files that come from the EXFO Connect server, you
will be prompted to either check them in, or discard them. See Managing
Files on page 119 for details.

To save a project file as a template:

On the File ribbon tab, click Save As, then Project As Template.
To save a project file under a new file name:
1. On the File ribbon tab, click Save, then Project As.
2. Type a new file name for the project.
3. Click Save.
To import a Fiber Characterization (FC) project:
1. If you have not done so already, select the Home tab.
2. Under Files, select Import FC Project (settings + files).
3. Select the file you want to import and its original location.

Post-Processing Software 45
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Projects

4. Select the destination where you want to import the file.

5. If you want to delete the file from the original location once the import
is complete, select the corresponding option.

6. Click Import to confirm your action.

The project is opened as the default project and all of the
corresponding settings are displayed accordingly.

Note: When you import a project, all of the files included in it are copied to the
selected location as well.

46 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Projects

To export a Fiber Characterization (FC) project:

1. Under Files, go to the Export and then select the Export FC Project
(settings + files) option.
2. If needed, enter a name for your project, and select a location.
3. Click Save to confirm your action.

Note: Exporting the project also exports the corresponding project files. The
default name for the exported project is the name of the project.

Adding and Removing Measurement Files

A FastReporter 3 project can contain files from different tests, and different
formats. For more information about the available formats, see the sections
corresponding to the format you want to use.
To add measurement files to a project:
1. From the File ribbon tab, click Open, then File.
2. If needed, select a desired file type to filter the available choices.

Note: You can set the direction in OTDR and FIP files by selecting the direction
when you add the files. For example, to set the direction of the selected
OTDR files to A->B, select OTDR A->B in the Files of type list.

Post-Processing Software 47
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Projects

3. Select the measurement files to add.

4. Click Open to add the selected files to the project.
When you open an OTDR file generated using the iOLM application, or a
file received from an OTDR manufacturer other than EXFO, a warning
message appears with the file name, indicating possible limitations or
consequences. You can choose not to see the message again, if you
already are aware of those limitations.

Note: When you open any read-only file in the application, it is indicated in the
Attributes column of the Files tab.

To remove measurement files from a project:

1. In the Files window, select the files you wish to remove.
2. Select the Home ribbon tab. Under Clipboard, select Delete.
3. Confirm your choice by clicking OK.

48 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Projects

Changing General Project Properties

You can provide a descriptive title for a project and identify the author,
company and customer.
To change general project properties:
1. Select the Home ribbon tab, then Settings.

2. Select the Identification tab, then click in the column to the right of
the property you want to change and enter the information.

Note: The template file name for the project is displayed automatically according
to the template you selected when you created the project.

3. Click Apply to apply the changes without closing the dialog box.
4. Click OK to close the Project Settings window.

Post-Processing Software 49
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Project Templates

Managing Project Templates

You can save the properties and settings you often use when creating
projects in a project template.
To create a project template:
1. On the File ribbon tab, select New, then Project.
2. In the list, select a template. If there is an existing template that already
has properties and settings that you want to use in the new template,
you can use it as a starting point.

3. Click OK.
4. Change the properties and settings to suit the projects you want to
create with the new template.

Note: Changes made to the display (for example, showing/hiding windows and
the ribbon) or to program options are saved when you end your work
session. They are not saved in project templates.

5. On the File ribbon tab, click Save, then Project As Template.

50 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Project Templates

6. In the File name box, type a name for the project template file.
FastReporter 3 automatically selects the folder where to save the
project template.
7. Click Save.

IMPORTANT
FastReporter 3 automatically saves project templates in the Project
Template folder. If you change the location, the template will not be
available for selection in the New Project dialog box when you start
a new project.

To change the default template file:

1. On the File ribbon tab, select New, then Project.
2. To set the new project template as the default template, click the file
name, and click Set as Default.

3. Click OK to start a new project or Cancel if you do not wish to start a

new project at this time.

Post-Processing Software 51
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Project Templates

To rename a project template:

To rename a project template, rename the project template file as you
would any other file while leaving the .prjt file extension intact. The
template will be listed on the New Project dialog box with the new name.
To remove a project templates:
To permanently remove a project template, simply delete the project
template file in the Project Template folder. To remove a project template
so that it is no longer listed on the New Project dialog box, remove it from
C:\ProgramData\EXFO\FastReporter 3\Standard\Project Template, and put
it in another folder.
If you later need to use the template, you can simply move it back to the
Project Template folder.

52 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Managing Project Templates

To display the project template name in the application title bar:

1. Select the Home ribbon tab, then Settings.

2. Under the Identification tab, select the corresponding option at the

bottom of the identification table.

3. Click Apply to apply the changes without closing the dialog box.
4. Click OK to close the Project Settings window.

Post-Processing Software 53
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Changing File Direction

Changing File Direction

Changing the direction for your measurement is useful when you create
your reports. For OTDR and iOLM test files, changing the file direction can
be useful to create bidirectional and virtual bidirectional files.

Note: You cannot change the direction on MAX-900 series OLTS files or iOLM FTTx
files.

To change the direction of the measurement or file:

1. Select the required measurement or file from the Measurement or
Files window.

Note: You can select multiple measurements change the direction if the direction
is supported by the measurements.

2. Select the Home ribbon tab.

3. Under Direction, select A->B or B->A to set the direction.

54 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

Matching Files
FastReporter 3 provides three options for matching files in projects:
 File matching based on information present in the file (for example,
matching fiber IDs and cable IDs). This is the default setting for
projects.
 File matching based on file name. You can have FastReporter 3 ignore
expressions in the file names. For example, if you select “A_B” as the
expression to ignore, a file named fiber1A_B.trc and a file named
fiber1.trc are considered as matching.
 Manual file matching.

Note: When working with TestFlow job files, the matching based on file name or
manual matching are not available.

Matching Files Based on Information

Depending on which identifiers you select, the automated matching
process will look for the corresponding information in your file to pair the
measurements.
The application allows you to add custom identifiers for OTDR, iOLM, OPM,
and PPM measurements. This option is available only if the OTDR, iOLM,
OPM/PPM plug-in is selected from the Home ribbon tab, under Settings.

Note: Only the selected identifiers are displayed in the Measurements window
and Matched Files window. By default, the custom identifiers added in the
Identification tab are considered for file matching, even if they are not
available in the identifiers list under the File Matching window.

Post-Processing Software 55
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

For this type of file matching, the file type is the first priority for each
measurement and the direction of the file is the second priority. The file
type priority and the direction priority is listed in the following tables.

File Type Priority

iOLM 1
OTDR 2
FIP 3
OLTS 4
OPM 5
PPM 6
PMD 7
CD 8

Direction Priority
A -> B 1
B -> A 2
Bidir 3
None 4

Note: The matching function is not case sensitive and will match actual numbers
(for example, 001 and 1 are both considered as the same number).

56 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

To automatically match files based on information:

1. Select the Home ribbon tab, then Settings.

2. Under the File Matching tab, select By information present on file.

3. If you want to perform inverted matching for your iOLM and power
meter files, select the corresponding option.

Post-Processing Software 57
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

IMPORTANT
If you want to perform inverted matching for the iOLM and power
meter measurements, you must select Support Inverted Identifiers.
Otherwise, this action will not be possible.

4. Select the required identifiers type to use them for file matching.

5. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply.
6. Click OK to close the Project Settings window.

58 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

To add an identifier:
1. Select the Home ribbon tab, then Settings.

2. Under the File Matching tab, click .

3. Enter a name for your identifier.

4. Click OK.
To delete identifiers:
1. Select the Home ribbon tab, then Project Settings.

2. Select the File Matching tab.

Post-Processing Software 59
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

3. Select the required identifiers that you want to delete.

4. Click to delete the identifiers. The application displays the

confirmation message to delete the identifiers.

Note: You cannot delete the default identifiers.

60 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

Matching Files Based on their File Names

The automated matching based on file name can be optimized by adding
expressions or terms to ignore, so that the matching is as specific as
possible.
To automatically match files by file name:
1. Select the Home ribbon tab, then Settings.

2. Click the File Matching tab.

3. Select By filename.

Post-Processing Software 61
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

4. If needed, add or remove items.

 Click , then type the expression to add to the list and click OK.

 Select an expression from the Ignored Expression list, then click

to remove it.
5. Click OK to exit the window.

Matching Files Manually

The manual file matching mode allows you to decide which files to match
in your list.
To match files manually:
1. Select the Home ribbon tab, then Settings.

2. Click the File Matching tab.

62 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

3. Click None (Manual).

4. Click OK.

Post-Processing Software 63
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Matching Files

5. In the Matched Files window, select a file in the File 1 column and
drag it into the File 2 column beside the file to match it to.
OR
Click in the File 2 column and click to display the File Selection
dialog box, which lists the files that have not yet been matched.

If you attempt to match files manually when one of the two automated
modes are selected (by information or by file name), FastReporter 3
will ask if you want to change the matching mode.

64 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Setting Auto Refresh in a Specific Folder

Setting Auto Refresh in a Specific Folder

The auto refresh option updates the Files and Measurement tabs for a
specified duration whenever you add files to a specified auto refresh folder.
You can specify the auto refresh folder on your computer, platform, USB
storage, or network drive.

Note: When the application is running, if the specified auto refresh folder is
modified or deleted, the application displays a warning message and the
default folder is selected.

To specify the auto refresh folder:

1. Select the Home ribbon tab, then Settings.

Post-Processing Software 65
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Setting Auto Refresh in a Specific Folder

2. Under the Auto Refresh tab, enable the Auto refresh option.

3. Click to locate the desired folder.

4. Select the auto refresh duration that suits your needs.
5. Click Apply to apply the changes without closing the dialog box.
6. Click OK to close the Project Settings window.

66 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

The loopback mode allows you to test both A -> B and B -> A, and
Tx and Rx at once, which saves time and manipulations. You can set the
loop length yourself, or let the application find it automatically with a
default loop length.
This mode is available for both OTDR and iOLM measurement files.
If you have activated the loopback option for your application, it is ready to
use when needed. You can use the loopback mode that fits your needs:
 Unidirectional: Will split the measurement file into two directions, with
the corresponding verdict.
 Bidirectional: Will split two unidirectional files set as a virtual
bidirectional file each their two directions.

Note: Files created using the loopback mode cannot be used again to perform a
bidirectional loopback, but you can redo a loopback with the unidirectional
mode result files.

Note: You cannot perform bidirectional loopback tests on iOLM multimode files.

Post-Processing Software 67
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

Performing Unidirectional Loopback

Measurements
The unidirectional loopback mode is available as soon as you select one
file. The steps are quite similar for the iOLM and OTDR modes; the iOLM
steps will be shown here for illustration purposes.
To perform a unidirectional loopback measurement:
1. Select the file or files that will be included in the test.
2. Depending on the measurements you are using, select either the
OTDR or iOLM tab, then under Tools select the corresponding button.

68 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

3. If needed, rearrange the files in the list. Since they appear in the same
order as they are in the Files tab, they may not be in the order that you
need them. You can sort the files using the headers in the table, or you
can drag the files manually in the list. Once you are done, click Next to
proceed to the next step.

Post-Processing Software 69
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

4. Set the automated documentation for your resulting files. If you have
done a loopback operation on them before, you may keep the
documentation information you had set then by selecting the
corresponding option.

70 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

If you want to use new information, proceed as follows:

4a. Select which identifiers will be used for the documentation. In
OTDR mode, you cannot change the identifier types. In iOLM
mode, you need at least two identifiers, either from the list of
available choices, or you can enter a new identifier of your
choice. The first identifier will be the one with the highest
occurrence rate in the corresponding identifiers of the selected
files. If no values were set, the first two default identifiers are
Cable ID and Fiber ID.

Note: You can have four identifiers for OTDR files, and up to five identifiers for
iOLM files.

To use the identifiers in the file name, select the corresponding

option.

Post-Processing Software 71
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

4b. Set the value you want to show for each identifier.

 Enter how many digits you want to use to increment the second
identifier automatically. The numbers will be incremented
automatically.

72 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

 If you are using identifiers 3 and 4, you can have the application to
automatically invert them for the second file of the loopback.
Select the Inverted by Pairs option to use the automatic inversion.
The Overview page will reflect your choice as follows:

Inverted by Pairs Corresponding Locations A and B

Status Information
Not selected Row 1: Fiber 0001, Location A, Location B
Row 2: Fiber 0002, Location A, Location B
Row 3: Fiber 0003, Location A, Location B
Row 4: Fiber 0004, Location A, Location B

And so on.
Selected Row 1: Fiber 0001, Location A, Location B
Row 2: Fiber 0002, Location B, Location A
Row 3: Fiber 0003, Location A, Location B
Row 4: Fiber 0004, Location B, Location A

And so on.

Post-Processing Software 73
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

 In the case of identifier 3 for iOLM, you can set a predefined list of
two or four items to use for each section of the measurement. The
items must be separated by a semi-colon (for example, “RX;TX”).
If you are using four items, they must all be different, or inverted
pairs (“AA;BB;CC;DD” or “AA;BB;BB;AA”). Depending on your
sequence for identifier 3, the output in the Overview page will
change.

Corresponding Fiber ID and Direction in

Identifier 3 Sequence
the Overview Page
RX;TX Row 1: Fiber 0001, RX
Row 2: Fiber 0001, TX
Row 3: Fiber 0002, RX
Row 4: Fiber 0002, TX

And so on.
AA;BB;CC;DD Row 1: Fiber 0001, AA
Row 2: Fiber 0001, BB
Row 3: Fiber 0001, CC
Row 4: Fiber 0001, DD
Row 5: Fiber 0002, AA
Row 6: Fiber 0002, BB
Row 7: Fiber 0002, CC
Row 8: Fiber 0002, DD

And so on.

74 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

 If you are testing iOLM files, you can use a configuration file to set
the threshold values by enabling the corresponding option. Click
Select to open the Apply Configuration File window, where you
can select the desired configuration. Click OK when you are done
and the selected configuration will be applied.
For more information about configurations files, see Managing
Configuration Files (Plus Mode) on page 282.

Once you are done, click Next to proceed to the next step.

Post-Processing Software 75
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

5. Set how you want the resulting files named.

5a. If desired, change the location where the files will be saved.

76 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

5b. Select which items to use in the file name. If you include the
measurement direction, select which nomenclature to use
(AB, BA; BA, AB; RX, TX or TX, RX).

Post-Processing Software 77
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

5c. Select which type of separator you want to use between the
items. Click Next to proceed to the next step.

78 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

6. In the Overview step, you can see the resulting files. The remaining
identification and threshold data other than the identifiers will be from
the original file.

7. Click Next to select the test mode.

Post-Processing Software 79
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

8. Select whether the loop will be automatically detected, or if you want

to do so manually. If you select the automated mode, enter a length
value for the loop.

9. If you are in Manual mode, set the loopback start and end elements:
 Click on the element that you want to use as the start element,
then click Set Loop Start. The selected elements will bear LS to
indicate their statuses.
 Click on the element that you want to use as the end element, then
click Set Loop End. The selected elements will bear LE to indicate
their statuses.
 If you want to use a section to set the loop start and end values,
select it, then click Set Loop Section. The loop start and end will
be placed on the event before and after the section.

Note: If you select an item in the cable view, all of the corresponding items in the
links are set as loop start or end at once.

80 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

OTDR

Set loop

Loop
remaining
to be set

Number of loops to set To change

tolerance level
Loop start Loop end

Post-Processing Software 81
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

iOLM

Set loop

Loop
remaining
to be set

Number of loops to set Loop Loop To change

start end tolerance level

82 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

10. If needed, you can change the tolerance levels by clicking the
corresponding button, and you will be taken to the iOLM or OTDR Set
Tolerance window to set the new value. Click OK to close the window,
and the values will be updated accordingly in the Loop Localization
window.

Note: For more information about setting tolerances, see Setting Event Matching
Tolerances on page 154.

OTDR

iOLM

11. Click Next to proceed to the Summary step.

Post-Processing Software 83
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

12. The result files and their statuses appear in the Summary step. If there
was something preventing the file from being generated, you can see
an explanation in the corresponding line.
You can select to keep the original files in your current project by
selecting the corresponding option at the bottom of the window.
You also have the opportunity to change the tolerance settings in this
window, as explained in step 10.
If you want to generate a report of your results, click the Report button
to open the corresponding window.

13. Click OK to complete the loopback process. The resulting files appear
in the Files tab.
If you have selected to keep the original files in your project, they will
stay in the Files list. Otherwise, all of the files for which the loopback
was successfully created will be removed from the list. The resulting
OTDR loopback files will have the same number of measurements as
the original files.

84 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

Performing Bidirectional Loopback Measurements

The bidir loopback mode is available when you select at least two files.
The steps are quite similar for the iOLM and OTDR modes; the iOLM steps
will be shown here for illustration purposes.
To perform a bidirectional loopback measurement:
1. Select the files that will be paired up.
2. Depending on the measurements you are using, select either the
OTDR or iOLM tab, then under Tools select the corresponding button.

Post-Processing Software 85
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

3. If needed, rearrange the files in the list. Since they appear in the same
order as they are in the Files tab, they may not be paired as you need
them. You can sort the files using the headers in the table, or you can
drag the files manually in the list. Once you are done, click Next to
proceed to the next step.
If you swap a pair, the application will ask you if you want to
automatically swap the other pairs in the same way.

86 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

4. Set the automated documentation for your resulting files. If you have
done a loopback operation on them before, you may keep the
documentation information you had set then by selecting the
corresponding option.

If you want to use new information, proceed as follows:

4a. Select which identifiers will be used for the documentation. In
OTDR mode, you cannot change the identifier types. In iOLM
mode, you need at least two identifiers, either from the list of
available choices, or you can enter a new identifier of your
choice. The first identifier will be the one with the highest
occurrence rate in the corresponding identifiers of the selected
files. If no values were set, the first two default identifiers are
Cable ID and Fiber ID.

Note: You can have four identifiers for OTDR files, and up to five identifiers for
iOLM files.

Post-Processing Software 87
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

To use the identifiers in the documentation, select the

corresponding Use in file name option.

88 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

4b. Set the value you want to show for each identifier. Enter also how
many digits you want to use to increment the second identifier
automatically. The numbers will be incremented automatically.

Post-Processing Software 89
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

If you are testing iOLM files, you can use a configuration file to set
the threshold values by enabling the corresponding option. Click
Select to open the Apply Configuration File window, where you
can select the desired configuration. Click OK when you are done
and the selected configuration will be applied.
For more information about configurations files, see Managing
Configuration Files (Plus Mode) on page 282.

5. Click Next to proceed to the next step.

90 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

6. Set how you want the resulting files named.

6a. If desired, change the location where the files will be saved.

Post-Processing Software 91
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

6b. Select which items to use in the file name.

Note: The Use the measurement wavelength option is available for the OTDR
files only.

92 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

6c. Select which type of separator you want to use between the
items. Click Next to proceed to the next step.

Post-Processing Software 93
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

7. In the Overview step, you can see the resulting bidirectional files. The
remaining identification and threshold data other than the identifiers
will be of the first file in the pair.

Note: In the case of OTDR files, a different file is displayed for each matched
wavelength.

8. Click Next to select the test mode.

9. In the case of OTDR files, select the perspective from which you want
to display the link view using the corresponding radio buttons. At this
point in the loopback process, the bidirectional traces shown are
virtual and created from two measurements composed of the two links
that are not cut yet.

94 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

When you select one of the links as the view direction, that link will be
considered as the A -> B unidirectional trace and the application
ensures that the resulting unidirectional elements of the selected link is
correctly aligned. The resulting unidirectional file on the other link will
however remain uncertain.
Switching from one view to the other makes sure that you can verify
that the two resulting unidirectional traces are adequate with perfectly
aligned elements after the traces are cut. It is important to perform this
verification before proceeding to the Overview step, where the final
results are produced and you cannot go back.

Post-Processing Software 95
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

10. Select whether the loop will be automatically detected, or if you want
to do so manually. If you select the automated mode, enter a length
value for the loop.

11. If you are in Manual mode, set the loopback start and end elements:
 Click on the element or section that you want to use as the start
element, then click Set Loop Start. The selected elements will
bear LS to indicate their statuses.
 Click on the element or section that you want to use as the end
element, then click Set Loop End. The selected elements will bear
LE to indicate their statuses.
 If you want to use a section to set the loop start and end values,
select it, then click Set Loop Section. The loop start and end will
be placed on the event before and after the section.

96 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

In OTDR mode, you can display the error table at the bottom of the
window using the corresponding button. This table indicates if there
are problems with the selected measurement files, and provides
information about the errors.

Note: If you select the element in the cable view, all of the corresponding
elements in the links are set as loop start or end at once.

OTDR

Set loop

Loop
remaining
to be set

Number of loops to set Loop end

Loop start To change tolerance

levels

Post-Processing Software 97
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

iOLM

Loop
remaining
to be set

Set loop

Loop start Loop end

To change tolerance
Number of loops to set
levels

98 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

12. If needed, you can change the tolerance levels by clicking the
corresponding button, and you will be taken to the iOLM or OTDR Set
Tolerance window to set the new value. Click OK to close the window,
and the values will be updated accordingly in the Loop Localization
window.

Note: For more information about setting tolerances, see Setting Event Matching
Tolerances on page 154.

OTDR

iOLM

Post-Processing Software 99
Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

13. Click Next to proceed to the Summary step.

14. The result files and their statuses appear in the Summary step. If there
was something preventing the file from being generated, you can see
an explanation in the corresponding line.
You can select to keep the original files in your current project by
selecting the corresponding option at the bottom of the window.
You also have the opportunity to change the tolerance settings in this
window, as explained in step 12.
If you want to generate a report of your results, click the Report button
to open the corresponding window.

100 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Working in Loopback Mode (Plus Mode)

15. Click OK to complete the loopback process. The resulting files appear
in the Files tab.
The result files and their statuses appear in the Summary step. If there
was something preventing the file from being generated, you can see
an explanation in the corresponding line.
In the case of iOLM files, separate bidirectional files will be created for
each wavelength with a matching measurement pair.
If you have selected to keep the original files in your project, they will
stay in the Files list. Otherwise, all of the files for which the loopback
was successfully created will be removed from the list.

Post-Processing Software 101

Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Changing the Main Measurement

Changing the Main Measurement

FastReporter 3 allows you to select which wavelength is the main
measurement for your files.
To change the main measurement:
1. Select the file for which you want to set the main measurement.
2. Select the Home ribbon tab.
3. Under Measurement, in the Main list, select the wavelength that you
want to use as the main measurement in the corresponding list.

Note: When you hover the mouse pointer over the selection area of a trace which
is not the main measurement, a tooltip with the fiber ID and measurement
wavelength is displayed.

102 FastReporter 3
 Working with Projects (Plus Mode)
Setting a Reference Measurement

Setting a Reference Measurement

When any measurement is selected as reference measurement, all of the
items in the reference measurement are considered as reference items.
To set a reference measurement:
1. Select the measurement that you want to use as the reference, either
in the Measurement tab or the event table.
2. Select the File ribbon tab, then Set as Reference File.
The measurement changes color in the table to indicate its new status
and the corresponding row is blocked at the top of the table so that you
always see it even when scrolling down the list of other
measurements.

Post-Processing Software 103

4 Using Cloud Applications
The following cloud applications are available for post-processing with
FastReporter 3:
 EXFO Connect, to manage your files
 TestFlow, to enable your software options and view and manage your
jobs.
 Using EXFO Exchange
You can login/logout from the EXFO Exchange Account or TestFlow
account using the Cloud menu. You can also perform various activities like
changing the Workspace, TestFlow options, and upload the test results to
your Workspace.

Logging in to the EXFO Exchange account

If you have not logged in the application and want to log in, click the Login
label on the title bar or click the Cloud tab, and then select the Login icon.

Changing Workspace
You can change the workspace if you have access to multiple workspaces.

Post-Processing Software 105

Using Cloud Applications

In the Cloud menu, select Change workspace sub-menu, and then select
the required workspace.

Uploading Results
As an EXFO Exchange user, you can upload the test result files available on
your system to your workspaces. The files that are not supported to upload
will be listed with an error message. To upload, you should have the
administrator rights of the selected workspace. Members cannot use this
feature. if you are not sure about your role for the selected workspace,
verify your role, go to File > Support > About FastReporter.

Note: This feature is not available in basic mode.

Note: At present, only the SOR measurement files are supported.

To upload the results to the workspace:

1. Go to Files > Open, and then select the test result files from your
system that you want to upload.
The selected files are added to the Files section.

2. Go to the Cloud menu, select the test measurement files you want to
upload from your system, and then select the Upload Results
sub-menu.

The files will be uploaded to your selected workspace. You will be notified
once done.

106 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications

Post-Processing Software 107

Using Cloud Applications

Log out from EXFO Exchange account

You can Log out from the EXFO Exchange account if required.

Note: If there are unsaved changes to the project or project files, you will be
prompted to save them when you are logging out from the EXFO Exchange
account.

To log out from EXFO Exchange account:

Click the Cloud tab, and then click the Logout icon.

108 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications

Log out from TestFlow Account/Change

Organization/Start TestFlow in a Browser
You can Log out from the TestFlow, Start TestFlow in a Browser, or Switch
your organization account

Note: If there are unsaved changes to the project or project files, you will be
prompted to save them when you log out from the TestFlow account.

To log out from TestFlow account:

Click the Cloud tab, and then click the Logout icon.

You can shift to another Organization account or start TestFlow in a

browser if required. Refer the above image.

Post-Processing Software 109

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

You can use FastReporter 3 conjointly with EXFO Connect to manage your
files. This active link let you check out the files you need using specific
search criteria, work on them, then check them in back into your server.
You can also download copies of your files if you want to work on them
without modifying your source files.

Note: When you log in to the EXFO Connect server for the first time, you will be
asked to read and accept the license agreement and change the default
password to one of your choice.

Setting Up the Connection to the Server

You can have the connection to the server done automatically, or you can
connect manually as needed.
To set up the connection information:
1. Select the Cloud tab, then under EXFO Connect, select Settings.

2. Select the EXFO Connect tab.

110 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

3. Under Login, enter the server and identification information to

connect the application to the server. You can have the application
remember your credentials and connect automatically to the server for
quicker access. This connection is automatic for that user only.
To log in to EXFO Connect:
Select the Cloud ribbon tab, then under EXFO Connect use the
corresponding button in the toolbar ( ).
When you are logged in successfully, you will notice your identifier at the
top right part of the main window.
To log out of EXFO Connect:
Select the Cloud tab, then under EXFO Connect use the corresponding
button in the toolbar ( ).

Post-Processing Software 111

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

Using the EXFO Connect Browser

The EXFO Connect browser features the search tools you need to retrieve
the files required for your analyses. As it is the case for the full EXFO
Connect application, you can check in and check out files, as well as work
on copies of your files so as not to compromise your data.

Note: The files you can process with this browser include optical test types only.
The transport and datacom, or access type files are not available.

Note: The browser included with FastReporter 3 only have limited features. For a
complete use of the EXFO Connect features and options, use the actual
application.

You can have the list of files in the server refresh automatically at set
intervals of time to make sure that you have the latest data to work with.

112 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

To display the browser on-screen:

From the main window, click the corresponding tab on the left part of the
screen. Drag the browser window to the desired size.

Note: The EXFO Connect Browser must be enabled under the Show/Hide
Windows menu of the Home tab to see the tab.

Post-Processing Software 113

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

To activate the automatic refresh for the browser:

1. Select the Cloud tab, then under EXFO Connect, select Settings.

2. Select the EXFO Connect tab.

3. Select the Refresh browser automatically option to activate it.

4. Set the desired refresh rate, in minutes. The minimum value is 5
minutes, and the maximum value is 60 minutes.

114 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

Searching for Files in the Browser

You can include different file types in your search, but any advanced search
on a specific file type has to be done individually.
To search for files in the browser:
1. In the browser window, select which types of files you want to include
in your search.

2. Select the period for which you want to perform your search. You can
select a preset value, or select the Custom range item and enter your
own value.

Post-Processing Software 115

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

3. If desired, select the business unit or units from where you want to
retrieve the data. The list of available business units will vary
depending on which business unit is available on the EXFO Connect
server.

4. If you want to add additional search criteria, select the corresponding

file type, then select more details.

Note: The available criteria will change depending on the type you select.

5. Select if you want to show a display view specific to the type of files
you are listing. This view will give you access to specific columns for
each type and help you in your search.

Note: You can only show one type of viewer at a time, or use the general view.

6. Click Search to start the search.

116 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

Applying Filters to Your Search Results

You can use filters in your browser so as to only see the files you want. Both
the column of the table and the actual contents of the columns can be
filtered.
You can also stretch or narrow the column width as needed.
To filter the columns you want to see:
1. In the browser, right-click on the columns.
2. Select which headers you want to display.

Post-Processing Software 117

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

To filter the items in each column:

1. In the browser, click in the column for which you want to use a filter.
2. Select which items you want to view.

3. To perform an even more detailed filter search, you can type a term
directly in the search box to reduce the list of available choices, and
click OK.

118 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

Managing Files
Managing the files is achieved through the available actions below:
 Checking out files: allows you to retrieve files from the server where
they are stored, and perform analyses and modifications on them.
When files are checked out, they are “reserved” by the user and
cannot be modified by another user.
 Discarding checked out files: If you change your mind about working
on some files and want to free them for other users, you can undo your
check out. Any change done to the files will be lost.
 Checking in files: Once you are done working with the files, you must
check them back in the server so that other users can consult them.
Any change done to the files you are checking in is saved into the
database.
 Uploading files: You can add new files to the server.
 Viewing files: You can get a read-only copy of the files from the server
for consultation purposes.
 Exporting files: You can obtain a local copy of a file that is not linked
with the server. This file is writable.
You can perform those actions directly in the browser by right-clicking on
the selected measurements, or in the Cloud ribbon tab under EXFO
Connect.

Post-Processing Software 119

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

To check out files:

1. In the EXFO Connect browser, select which files you want to check
out. You can select more than one file.

2. Select the Cloud tab, then under EXFO Connect, select Check out and
Edit.

120 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

3. Once the check-out operation is complete, click Close to open the

files.

You can see the progress as the files are downloaded to their local folder. If
there was a problem with any of the files, you will be notified with an icon
next to the file and a description of the problem. The selected files are now
identified as checked out in the browser and are added in the Files tab.

Post-Processing Software 121

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

To undo a check out of your files:

1. In the EXFO Connect browser, select which files for which you want to
remove the check out. You can select more than one file.

Note: You can only remove a check-out status on files that you have checked out.

2. Select the Cloud tab, then under EXFO Connect, select Discard Check
Out.

122 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

3. Confirm that you want to discard your checked out file from your local
folder.

You can see the progress as the files are removed from the local folder. If
there was a problem with any of the files, you will be notified on-screen.

Post-Processing Software 123

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

To check in files:
1. In the EXFO Connect browser, select which files you want to check in.
You can select more than one file.

Note: To find all of the files with a check-out status, you can use a filter search.
See Applying Filters to Your Search Results on page 117 for details.

2. Select the Cloud tab, then under EXFO Connect, select Check In.

Note: If your files were modified, you will be prompted to save them.

124 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

3. If desired, enter a comment for your check-in.

You can see the progress as the files are uploaded to the server. If there
was a problem with any of the files, you will be notified on-screen. The
selected files are removed from the application as they are successfully
uploaded.

Post-Processing Software 125

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

To upload files:
1. In the Files tab, select which files you want to upload to the server. You
can select more than one file.
2. Select the Cloud tab, then under EXFO Connect, select Upload Files.
3. If desired, enter a comment for your upload.

126 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

4. Select which business unit the uploaded files belong to in the list, if
desired.

5. Click Upload to complete the transfer.

You can see the progress as the files are uploaded to the server. If there
was a problem with any of the files, you will be notified on-screen. The
selected files are left in the application.

Note: The files will appear in the EXFO Connect browser the next time the latter is
refreshed.

Post-Processing Software 127

To view files in read-only mode:
1. In the EXFO Connect browser, select which files you want to
download. You can select more than one file.

2. Select the Cloud tab, then under EXFO Connect, select View (Read
Only).
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

3. Once the download operation is complete, click Close to open the

files.

You can see the progress as the files are copied to their local folder. If there
was a problem with any of the files, you will be notified on-screen. The
selected files are now identified as read-only in the browser and are added
in the Files tab.

Post-Processing Software 129

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

To export a file:
1. In the EXFO Connect browser, select which files you want to copy. You
can select more than one file.

2. Select the Cloud tab, then under EXFO Connect, select Export.

130 FastReporter 3
 Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

3. If desired, select a location for your copy.

Post-Processing Software 131

Using Cloud Applications
Using FastReporter 3 with EXFO Connect

4. Click Export to confirm the transfer.

You can see the progress as the files are copied to their local folder. If there
was a problem with any of the files, you will be notified on-screen. The
selected files are now identified as read-only in the browser and are added
in the Files tab.

132 FastReporter 3
5 Working with OTDR Files
The application shows the result of the OTDR analysis in the graph area.
You can view the OTDR traces in two different manners:
 Graph view: This is the standard OTDR view. You can see the events
along the trace marked by red vertical lines.

Default Injection Level

Span Start
Event
Main Trace
Span End

Marker

 Linear view: The linear view is a graphical representation of the link,

where each event is displayed as a box containing the symbol
corresponding to the event type.

Span
Start

Event with fail status Span End

Event with pass status
Fiber section

Post-Processing Software 133

Working with OTDR Files

When you are working with more than one measurements in the Linear
view, you can also display the Cable view at the top of the list. It shows all
of the measurements grouped into one link, with the link overview. The
total number of selected fibers is indicated on the left and each event has
its own identification number.
When matched events are of the same type, you can see how many there
are on the upper left corner of the event icon. If the number is blue, all
fibers contain this event. If the number is yellow, at least one fiber does not
have this event. If events at the same position are not of the same type, a
question mark icon replaces the event type.

Anomaly
Total number detected Event ID
of events number

Event is not Event is on all Events in this

on all fibers fibers location are not of
the same type

Note: When viewing grouped fibers, the Span End event (B) is set according to
the reference measurement if there is one; if there is no reference
measurement, it is set according to the shortest fiber. The events located
between the Span Start and Span End events (including both A and B) are
numbered.

You can perform the same actions (adding, modifying and deleting events,
setting span start and end) on single fiber and multiple fibers; the main
difference is that if you perform the actions on the cable at the top of the
linear view, all of the included fibers are modified accordingly.

134 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files

To select the viewing method:

1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under View, select whether you want to view the linear or graphic
view.

Note: When in linear view, the zoom and marker features are not available.
However, you can add, delete, and change events from the linear view.

To display the Cable view:

1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Select the linear viewing method.
3. Under View, select Graph Options, then Display Cable View Section.

Post-Processing Software 135

Working with OTDR Files

Depending on the file format, you can perform different operations. See
the table below for details:

Telcordia Telcordia Telcordia Telcordia Telcordia

EXFO
100 200 200 100 200
Action Nativea,b
EXFO EXFO EXFO iOLM Non-EXFO Non-EXFO
(.trc, .bdr) c,d
(.sor) (.sor) (.sor) (.sor) (.sor)
Changing job      
information (such
as Fiber ID, Job ID,
Cable ID, and so
on)
Editing events    - - 
Inserting events    - - 
Deleting events    - - 
Managing span    - - 
RBS, event    - - -
detection,
thresholds
Managing bidir    - - 
Managing    - - 
templates
IOR, Helix    - - 
Event Detection    - - -
(reanalysis)
Pass/Fail thresholds      
a. The native formats also include FTB-100 version 2.7 (.ftb100) and FTB-300 (.ftb300).

136 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files

b. The 64-bit version of FastReporter 3 may not support all file formats. To view files that come from older
OTDR modules, save them first in a newer *.trc format using the 32-bit version of the application.
c. The actions are valid only if the event markers are properly saved. If not, the files are considered as the
same thing as viewing Telcordia 100 N on-EXFO files.
d. Providing that the manufacturer complies with the Bellcore standard.

Post-Processing Software 137

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

Changing OTDR Settings

When viewing your OTDR files, you can change general properties,
pass/fail thresholds for selected wavelengths, event matching tolerances,
and automatic file matching rules for the OTDR projects.

Changing General Settings

General options include items such as the pulse baseline, visual settings,
and event calculation and threshold settings.
To change OTDR general settings:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Select Settings.

3. Click the General tab.

138 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

4. Select if you want the pulse baseline to be based on time or distance.

Note: The pulse baseline distance is always given in meters.

Post-Processing Software 139

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

5. Change the numeric value precision settings for distance and length,
loss, reflectance, attenuation, or ORL, if desired.
These settings also affect span loss, average loss, average splice loss
and maximum splice loss.

Note: The numeric precision in the linear view does not apply if the selected units
are meters or feet.

140 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

6. Indicate whether you want to display the error messages when

creating virtual bidirectional files. This option will let FastReporter 3
notify you when a bidirectional file cannot be created, and indicate the
reason why.

Post-Processing Software 141

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

7. If you want the zoom area and marker positions to be saved in your
OTDR file, enable the corresponding option. By default, this option is
not selected.

142 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

8. If you want the event calculations and pass/fail thresholds to be saved

when they are not included in the original file, select the corresponding
option. Otherwise, the default values are used.

Post-Processing Software 143

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

9. Select how the events will be matched, either using the position (the
distance on the fiber), or the event number. The span start is
considered as event number 1, or the start position.

Note: Some operations, such as delete, add, and add to other measurements are
not available when the events are matched by number.

10. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
return the general settings back to their original values, click Default
Settings.

144 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

Changing Pass/Fail Thresholds

You can change the pass/fail threshold values for one, or many
wavelengths at a time.
You can also change the threshold values for the current measurement.
To change OTDR Pass/Fail Thresholds:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Select Settings.

3. Click the Pass/Fail Thresholds tab.

Post-Processing Software 145

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

4. Select how you want to set the thresholds:

 If you want to use the threshold values from the measurement file,
select the corresponding option. However, if you are working with
older file versions, the threshold values may not be available.

 If you want to use the threshold values from the application,

proceed as follows:
Select one or several wavelengths to modify.
If you do not see a wavelength, you can add it by clicking the
button, entering the wavelength value, and clicking OK.
Modify the thresholds associated with the wavelengths needed, by
clicking in the desired threshold value and modifying it in the table.
The Apply option must be enabled for the threshold to be active
and modifiable.

Note: If you are using the fiber attenuation section threshold, you can specify the
minimum section length at the bottom of the table. This can be useful
when testing short links, as attenuation measurements on them can be
unreliable. The fiber section threshold will not be applied to fiber sections
shorter than the length you have set as a minimum value.

146 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

If you have selected more than one wavelength, all of them will be
modified at the same time.
Select whether you want to include the span start and end values
in your threshold calculations.

Note: When the span start and span end values are included, the corresponding
events are included in the ORL calculation. The span start and end loss
values, and the span ORL values are updated when the span start and
span end inclusion settings are modified. The maximum splice loss is also
impacted by the fact that the span start and end values are included or not.

Note: When span start and span end values are excluded, pass/fail thresholds
are no longer applied to the corresponding span start or span end events.

Post-Processing Software 147

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

5. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
apply the changes and close the window, click OK.

Note: If the measurement contains connector loss and splice loss for a merged
event, the loss value status and measurement status is calculated on the
basis of the selected thresholds. If thresholds are applied and the status is
pass, the measurement status is indicated as pass. If thresholds are applied
and the status is fail, the measurement status is indicated as unknown. If
none of the thresholds are applied, the measurement status is indicated as
unknown.

Note: When the span ORL value is preceded by a “<” and the ORL threshold is
smaller than or equal to the value, the global pass/fail status for the
measurement will be unknown or fail.

To view and modify a threshold value for the current

measurement:
1. From the Files or Measurement tab, select the measurement or
measurements as desired.
The current pass/fail threshold statuses are indicated in the list: green
for pass, yellow for warning and red for fail.

148 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

2. In the Results window, select the Thresholds tab.

3. If you want to modify a threshold at this point, double-click in the
corresponding field, and enter the new value.

Note: If you are using the fiber attenuation section threshold, you can specify the
minimum section length at the bottom of the table. This can be useful
when testing short links, as attenuation measurements on them can be
unreliable. The fiber section threshold will not be applied to fiber sections
shorter than the length you have set as a minimum value.

Note: If there are more than one threshold value for a given wavelength, they are
separated by a semicolon.

Note: Select required wavelengths or you can select All to select all wavelengths.

Post-Processing Software 149

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

4. If you are using the application’s event calculations and thresholds, you
can also select whether you want to include the span start and end
values.

Note: Some threshold values may not be available for older file versions.

150 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

Setting Macrobend Tolerances

FastReporter 3 can locate macrobends by comparing the loss of events
occurring at a certain wavelength (for example, 1310 nm) with the loss of
the corresponding events at a greater wavelength (for example, 1550 nm).
FastReporter 3 will identify a macrobend when comparing two events if:
 Of the two events, the greater loss occurred at the greater wavelength.
AND
 The difference between the loss of two events exceed the defined
delta loss value. The default delta loss value is 0.5 dB (which is suitable
for most fibers), but you can modify it.
Changes made to event matching tolerances will affect macrobends.
To set macrobend tolerances:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Select Settings.

3. Click the Tolerances tab.

Post-Processing Software 151

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

4. Under Macrobend tolerances, change the tolerance value for

wavelength pairs as needed.
 To add a wavelength pair, click the button, enter the
wavelength values, and click OK.
 To remove unwanted pairs, select the values in the Wavelength
Pair list, and click the button.

Note: If you select more than one wavelength in the list, any modification to the
thresholds will apply to all of the selected wavelengths.

Note: To remove all added wavelength pairs and set all tolerance values back to
their original settings, click Default Settings.

5. Click OK to exit the window.

152 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

To view macrobends:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Event Table, select Show/Hide Details, then Macrobends.

Macrobends are identified in the OTDR Event Table by the following

symbol: .
In the case where you have multiple files with a single wavelength (this
often occurs for Telcordia type files), you must first match those files in
order to see the possible macrobends in the Matched Files tab, then select
these matched files to view the macrobends in the event table.

Post-Processing Software 153

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

Setting Event Matching Tolerances

The OTDR Event Table is built by matching events from selected
measurements according to the tolerance. To be matched, the distance
between events from the different measurements must be within the
tolerance.
You can force the matching of two events or separate them by changing
the event matching tolerance accordingly. The tolerance is applied to all
operations related to the event table including apply reference as template
and macrobends.

Tolerance Tolerance

154 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

Although you can set the event matching tolerance to as little as 20 meters
for each pulse width, the results may differ due to cursor aliasing. Cursor
aliasing checks if markers A and B for two events overlap. These markers
are set during analysis. Marker A represents the beginning of a measured
event while marker B represents its end.
This means that two events could be matched in the event table even if
their markers A are farther apart than the tolerance if there is an overlap
between the spans created by their markers A and B. Cursor aliasing
becomes more important with larger pulse widths since these traces have
greater A-B spans.
To change OTDR event matching tolerances:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Select Settings.

Post-Processing Software 155

Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

3. Click the Tolerances tab.

156 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing OTDR Settings

4. Under Event matching tolerances, change the tolerance value for

pulses as needed.
 To add a pulse, click the button, enter the pulse value, and click
OK.
 To remove unwanted pulses, select the values in the Pulse list, and
click the button.

Note: If you select more than one pulse in the list, any modification to the
thresholds will apply to all of the selected pulses.

Note: To remove all added pulses and set all tolerance values back to their
original settings, click Default Settings.

5. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
apply the changes and close the dialog box, click OK.
See Setting Macrobend Tolerances on page 151 for instructions on using
the Macrobend tolerances section on the Tolerances tab.

Post-Processing Software 157

Working with OTDR Files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

The auto template lets you add and remove events on links based on their
occurrence on the total group of selected links. You can set a percentage
value that will indicate whether an event should be added or removed. The
auto template is particularly useful for obtaining uniformity when testing
many traces on a same fiber.
Once the auto template is used, you can analyze the results; if there are
issues with some of the elements, you can view them in a descriptive
summary.
To enable and use the auto template in your project:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Measurement, select the corresponding button.

158 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

3. Enable the option to be able to set the preferences.

Post-Processing Software 159

Working with OTDR Files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

4. If you want to add events, select the corresponding option and enter
the minimum percentage value of occurrences required to add the
event to the remaining links.

5. If you want to remove events, select the corresponding option and

enter the percentage value of occurrences under which the event must
fall to be remove it from the measurement.

6. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
apply the changes and close the window, click OK.

160 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

To apply auto template settings to the current measurements:

1. Open the measurements you want to include in the auto template
operation.
2. From the Measurement menu, select OTDR, then Event and Auto
Template.
3. If you want to add events, select the corresponding option and enter
the minimum value of occurrences required to add the event to the
remaining links.

4. If you want to remove events, select the corresponding option and

enter the value of occurrences under which the event must fall to be
remove it from the measurement.

5. Click OK to confirm your choice and start the operation.

Note: The values modified in the window will not be kept for future applications
of the auto template. They are for the current measurements only.

Post-Processing Software 161

Working with OTDR Files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

The events will be added or deleted according to the Auto template

settings. The results will be updated in the Event Table. If some issues
occur during the process, a summary will indicate which event is
concerned.

162 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing the OTDR Event Table View

Managing the OTDR Event Table View

The OTDR event table can be customized to show only the items that are
relevant for your tests. The items you can display or hide include the
following:
 Fiber ID
 Fiber Pass/Fail Status
 Wavelength
 Direction
 Event
 Section
 Event Loss
 Event/Section statistics
 Fiber statistics
 Bidir. details (direction, average)
 Reflectance
 Merge details

Post-Processing Software 163

Working with OTDR Files
Managing the OTDR Event Table View

 Macrobends
 Event position
 Span start/end events
 B -> A position from B (if the bidir details and event position are
displayed in the window, this will display the event positions according
to B, for example, the last event will be identified as the first event).
 Display the event type as text or as an image
 Section loss
 Attenuation
 Section length
 Values relative to the reference file
OTDR events can be edited if the file format supports modification.

164 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing the OTDR Event Table View

To customize the Event Table view:

1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Event Table, select Show/Hide Details, then select or clear any
of the event or segment views as desired.

Note: You can also select the items by right-clicking into the event table itself. The
available items depend on where you click in the table.

To edit OTDR events:

1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Events, select any of the following edit options:

Edit Option Description

Displays a dialog box to confirm deletion of the
selected event. Click Yes to delete or No to
cancel. An event can be deleted only if the file
format supports modification. You cannot delete
the Span Start event if it is the same as the
Launch level and you cannot delete the Span
End event if it is also the End of fiber, End of
analysis or if it is a Continuous fiber (no End of
fiber event).
Sets the selected event as the span start.

Sets the selected event as the span end.

Post-Processing Software 165

Working with OTDR Files
Managing the OTDR Event Table View

Edit Option Description

Adds the selected event to other selected OTDR
measurements. An event can be added to other
measurements only if the file format supports
modification.
Displays the OTDR Event Properties dialog box,
where you can edit properties for the selected
events or sections.

You can edit the properties for OTDR events and sections. Event properties
that cannot be edited are shaded.
To edit OTDR event properties:
1. In the Measurements window, select an OTDR measurement file.
2. In the Event table, select the events or sections to modify.

3. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR ribbon tab.
4. Under Event, select the corresponding button.

166 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing the OTDR Event Table View

5. Modify the properties as needed. The editable values are shown in a

white background.
6. You can change the event types in two ways, a normal way and a quick
way:
6a. From the Ribbon bar (Menu items - Normal way):
 Select the Change Event Type icon.

 On the Event properties window that appears, change the event

type from the Type drop-down list.The comment you type will be
displayed as a tool-tip when you hover a cursor over the event.

 Click OK to confirm your changes.

Post-Processing Software 167

Working with OTDR Files
Managing the OTDR Event Table View

6b. From the Results section, Event Table (Quick way):

 On the Event Table tab, go to the event columns (Event 1, Event 2,
and so on), hover the cursor over the event type (Reflective,
Non-Reflective, Splitter and so on.), and then select the respective
event type icon that pops-up after hovering.

After selection, the selected icon will be highlighted, and the Event type
name appears after moving away the cursor from the event type. This is the
quickest way to change the event type.

Note: Use the normal way of changing the event if you want to add a comment to
the event type.

Note: You can disable/enable the Quick Event change mode from the OTDR >
Show/Hide details menu.

168 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Setting the OTDR Graphic Display Options

Setting the OTDR Graphic Display Options

You can change the display of graphics for OTDR measurements.
To change OTDR graphic display options:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under View, select Graph Options, then select or clear any of the
following OTDR graphic display options:
 Outside Spans to display or hide information outside the
measurement spans on the graph, when the zoom level is set to
100 % (1:1).
 Markers to display or hide markers on the graph.
 Invert B->A dB Axis to invert B to A along the dB axis on the
graph.

Note: Some options might not be available if you are in linear view mode.

Post-Processing Software 169

Working with OTDR Files
Viewing Section Length for the Linear View

Viewing Section Length for the Linear View

When in linear view, the application displays the section length between
the events. You can also choose to hide it.
To view or hide the section length:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under View, select Graph Options, then View Section Length.

170 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Using the Zoom Functions

Using the Zoom Functions

Various zoom options can help you to view specific portion of the graph
window.
To select the OTDR zoom options:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Zoom, select one of the following OTDR zoom options:

Icon Description Shortcuts

100 % (1:1) to display the full graph for the Ctrl + Home
measurement (default setting).

Horizontal zoom to zoom and view the graph Ctrl + Alt

horizontally. You can do the horizontal zoom in
the following ways.
 Press Ctrl + Alt, then scroll the mouse wheel
forward or backward.
 Press Ctrl + Alt and drag the mouse over the
part of the graph that you want to magnify,
forming a rectangle. When you release the
mouse button, the new zoomed area
corresponds to the rectangle size and
position.

Note: If you press Ctrl + Alt but do not

select a rectangle size, the graph is
zoomed by a 2X factor.

Post-Processing Software 171

Working with OTDR Files
Using the Zoom Functions

Icon Description Shortcuts

Vertical zoom to zoom and view the graph Ctrl + Shift
vertically.
 Press Ctrl + Shift, then scroll the mouse
wheel forward or backward.
 Press Ctrl + Shift and drag the mouse over
the part of the graph that you want to
magnify, forming a rectangle. When you
release the mouse button, the new zoomed
area corresponds to the rectangle size and
position.

Note: If you press Ctrl + Shift but do not

select a rectangle size, the graph is
zoomed by a 2X factor.
Horizontal + vertical zoom to zoom and view the Ctrl
horizontal as well as vertical details of the graph
for the selected measurement.
 Pres Ctrl, then scroll the mouse wheel
forward or backward.
 Press Ctrl and drag the mouse over the part
of the graph that you want to magnify,
forming a rectangle. When you release the
mouse button, the new zoomed area
corresponds to the rectangle size and
position.

Note: If you press Ctrl but do not select a

rectangle size, the graph is zoomed
by a 2X factor.
Selected event from file to zoom to a selected None
event saved in the file, if present, auto zoom
(event splice level) is applied.

172 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Using the Zoom Functions

Icon Description Shortcuts

Manual zoom from file to manually zoom using None
the information saved in the file. Once this
option is selected, it displays the saved zoomed
area even if you change the measurement
selection.
Undo last zoom operation. None

Auto-zoom on Event Splice None

Auto-zoom on Event Reflectance None

Auto-zoom on the 4 markers to focus where the None

analysis was used to calculate the event loss.
Submarkers a and b are placed where the
analysis was used to calculate the event loss,
and markers A and B are placed where the
analysis was used to calculate the event section
loss

Post-Processing Software 173

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

Managing Markers
FastReporter 3 allows you to set four markers (A, a, B, and b) for manual
measurement purposes. You can move the markers independently, or you
can also lock or unlock the distance between the four markers and move
them as a block. You can lock or unlock the distance between the A and a
marker pair, as well as the B and b marker pair and move them. Below you
can see the list of the lock options.
 Lock All: All the markers are locked and can be moved as a group.
 Lock a, A: The distance between marker a and A are locked and can
be moved as a group.
 Lock b, B: The distance between ‘b’ and ‘B’ are locked and can be
moved as a group.
To lock and unlock the marker position:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Markers, click on the required lock option.

Note: When none of the markers are in a locked mode, you can temporarily lock
the distance between all markers and move them as a block by pressing
the Shift key on the keyboard and dragging them around with your mouse.

174 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

To modify the marker position:

Select the marker from the graph area and drag it to the desired position to
modify the marker position.
OR
Select the marker from the graph area and move the marker by scrolling
the mouse wheel forward and backward.
OR
Modify the marker position in the Markers table by entering a new marker
position value direct input from the keyboard.
OR
Select the required marker(s) and move the selected marker(s) by clicking
the left and right arrow keys of the keyboard.

Note: You can select the next visible marker by pressing the Ctrl + Tab keys.

Post-Processing Software 175

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

Performing Manual Measurements with Markers

The information related to the markers is displayed in the Markers and
Manual measurement table under the Markers tab.
Various options of the Manual Measurement table are described below.

Option Description
4-point event In the 4-point event loss, four markers (a, A, b, and B) are visible. This
loss least square approximation method is used to fit a straight line to the
backscatter data within the two regions defined by markers a, A and b,
B, that is over the regions to the left and to the right of the event
bordered by markers A and B, respectively.
A-B LSA loss This loss of event bordered by the markers A and B is obtained by fitting
a straight line to the backscatter data between these two markers.
2-point In the 2-point section attenuation, two markers (A and B) are visible.
section This measurement gives the reduction in Rayleigh backscatter level as
attenuation a function of distance (always expressed in dB/km to follow the
standards of the fiber-optic industry) between two selected points.
Only those two points are used to perform the calculation and there is
no averaging.
A-B LSA This LSA attenuation is obtained by fitting a straight line between two
attenuation points in the backscatter data between markers A and B.
A-B ORL This displays the ORL between markers A and B.
3-point In the 3-point reflectance, three markers (a, A, and B) are visible. This
reflectance measurement displays the reflectance pointed by marker a, A, and B.
3-point This measurement displays maximum reflectance for the selected
maximum event.
reflectance

176 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

To display and hide the marker-related features:

1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Markers, select the corresponding button, then select the
desired features.

Adding an OTDR Event with one Marker

FastReporter 3 allows you to add a new OTDR event according to the
position of marker A. It automatically repositions the markers other than A
at the best position to characterize the most probable event in the area. It
automatically selects the appropriate event type according to the
measurement characteristics such as reflective event, non-reflective event,
or positive event.

Post-Processing Software 177

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

To add an OTDR event with one marker:

1. On the graph, place marker A where you want to add an event.
2. In the OTDR tab under Events select the corresponding button.

Note: You cannot perform this operation if the origin of the selected file does not
allow modifications. For example, you cannot perform this operation on
“Telcordia 100" files from other OTDR manufacturers.

Note: You cannot add an event using marker A on bidirectional OTDR files.

Note: The manually modified events are displayed with an asterisk (*) mark. For
more information on changing display options, see Changing FastReporter
3 Options on page 31.

Adding an OTDR Event with all Markers

The application allows you to add a new OTDR event according to the
position of all the markers. It selects the most appropriate event type
according to the measurement characteristics such as reflective event,
non-reflective event, or positive event.
To add an OTDR event with all markers:
1. On the graph, place all of the markers where you want to add an event.
2. In the OTDR tab under Events, select the corresponding button.

178 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

Note: You cannot perform this operation if the origin of the selected file does not
allow modifications. For example, you cannot perform this operation on
“Telcordia 100" files from other OTDR manufacturers.

Note: You cannot add an event using all markers on bidirectional OTDR files.

When an event cannot be created in the specified position, an error

message is displayed. You cannot create any event in following conditions:
 If the marker from any event is present in between markers A and B.
For example: In the below image the gray markers indicate the position
of the earlier event and the blue lines indicate the position where you
are trying to add new event. In this condition the application displays
an error message, to indicate that you cannot insert new event.

Markers of the
earlier event

Markers of the
new event

Post-Processing Software 179

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

 If any event is present between two markers.

For example: In the below image, the blue lines indicate the position of
the marker for the new event which you are trying to add. Event 3 is
shown between these two markers. In this condition the application
displays an error message, to indicate that you cannot insert new
event.

Note: The manually modified events are displayed with an asterisk (*) mark. For
more information on changing display options, see Changing FastReporter
3 Options on page 31.

180 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

Modifying Event Marker Positions on Existing

Events
FastReporter 3 allows you to reposition the existing events.
To modify the event markers position on an existing event:
1. On the graph, select the event for which you want to modify the
marker position.
2. In the OTDR ribbon tab under Events, select the corresponding button.

3. Modify the marker position from the graph window.

Note: When the event marker repositioning operation is initiated, the four
manual markers position are set to match the selected events own
markers. Once the event marker’s new position is confirmed, then all the
information related to the event is updated.

Post-Processing Software 181

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

4. Press Enter to confirm the repositioning or Esc to cancel the process.

Note: If marker repositioning is not possible in the particular position, a

notification message is displayed.

Note: You cannot perform this operation if the origin of the selected file does not
allow modifications. For example, you cannot perform this operation on
“Telcordia 100" files from other OTDR manufacturers.

Note: You cannot modify event markers on bidirectional OTDR files.

Note: The manually modified events are displayed with an asterisk (*) mark. For
more information on changing display options, see Changing FastReporter
3 Options on page 31.

182 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing Markers

Retrieving Marker Position from File

The application allows you to retrieve the marker position to the original
values when the file was last opened or saved.
To retrieve the marker position from file:
1. On the Measurements window select the required measurement.
2. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR ribbon tab.
3. Under Markers, select the corresponding button.

Note: If there are no marker positions for the measurements, the application sets
the marker position with a spacing value of 1/5 of the span length.

Bringing All Markers to the Current View

If you have zoomed into a graph, you might not be able to see the markers
anymore unless you move the trace. You can quickly bring all of the
markers in view so that you can reposition them as needed.
4. On the Measurements window select the required measurement.
5. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR ribbon tab.
6. Under Markers, select the corresponding button.

Post-Processing Software 183

Working with OTDR Files
Setting and Applying OTDR/OTDR Bidir Reference as Template (Plus Mode)

Setting and Applying OTDR/OTDR Bidir

Reference as Template (Plus Mode)
The Apply Reference as Template tool allows you to analyze
measurements and compare them to a reference file. The template
concept is to set a reference file (template), add comments about the
events, and compare each measurement to the reference file. FastReporter
3 will mark and measure any missing event. Inserted events are indicated
by an asterisk (*). Event matching tolerances will affect template results.
Events not present in the reference appear as white columns. Comments
for events in the reference file are automatically copied to the selected
files.

Note: The measurement file format must support this feature.

Note: DWDM OTDR files cannot be used to set a reference as a template.

Singlemode measurements will be compared to singlemode

measurements; multimode measurements will be compared to
multimode measurements.
The measurement files must meet the following criteria:
 It must have at least two events.
 It must have a span start and a span end.
 It must have a fiber section.

184 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Setting and Applying OTDR/OTDR Bidir Reference as Template (Plus Mode)

To set and apply OTDR and bidirectional OTDR files as a reference

template:
1. In the Files tab, select the OTDR or bidirectional OTDR file that you
want to use as the reference.
2. Under Files, select Set as Reference File.

Note: You can also set the virtual OTDR bidirectional file as reference from the
Measurements tab and Event Table.

3. In the Files window, select the OTDR files to which you want to apply
the reference file as a template.

Post-Processing Software 185

Working with OTDR Files
Setting and Applying OTDR/OTDR Bidir Reference as Template (Plus Mode)

4. Select the OTDR ribbon tab.

5. Under Tools, select the corresponding button.

6. Set the parameters for the OTDR template.

 Use same wavelength for all measurements: to apply the same

wavelength to all measurements. If a file with multiple wavelength
files is used as a reference and the option is not selected, the
measurements will be compared to the same wavelength
(1310 nm with 1310 nm, 1550 nm with 1550 nm).
 Remove events not present in reference: to remove the events
not present in the reference file from the selected files.
 Apply reference spans start/end: to apply the reference
measurement’s spans to the selected files.

186 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Setting and Applying OTDR/OTDR Bidir Reference as Template (Plus Mode)

 Apply reference event types: to apply the events between the

span start and span end events. This option is active for the current
working session only and will be reset when the application is
started again.
 Apply manual measurement markers and zoomed area: to apply
the reference’s marker position and zoom to the selected files. If
the marker positions is outside the range of the trace destination,
the operation will be aborted and the destination trace keeps its
original zoom factor.
 Copy documentation from reference (except Fiber ID): to
include all of the available documentation to the selected files. The
fiber ID will not be copied.
 Copy reference event markers (a,A,B,b) position: to apply the
reference file markers to the selected files.

Note: You are notified when the zoom is not applied.

Note: This option is available only if the Markers item is enabled from the Graph
Options button under View.

 Copy documentation from reference (except Fiber ID): to apply

the documentation from the reference file to the selected files. The
documentation includes job ID, customer, company, operator A,
operator B, cable ID, location A, location B, and comments.
 Copy reference events markers (a,A,B,b) position: to copy the
events markers (a, A, B, b) from the reference measurement to the
selected files.

Note: When an event marker position from the reference measurement cannot
be copied to the selected measurement due to length constrain or any other
reason, the application does not display any error message.

7. Click OK.

Post-Processing Software 187

Working with OTDR Files
Analyzing Measurements

Analyzing Measurements
FastReporter 3 lets you analyze the unidirectional and bidirectional OTDR
measurements at any time.
The bidirectional measurements are reanalyzed when A->B or B->A
measurements are reanalyzed, and in case of the following modifications:
 Event addition
 Event deletion
 Change in event type
 Change in span start position
 Change in span end position
 IOR
 Helix Factor
 Splice Loss Threshold
 Reflectance Threshold
 End-of-Fiber Threshold
Analyzing measurements will:
 analyze measurements acquired from different sources or with other
products.
 recreate the original event table if it was modified.
 reset the span start to zero and the span end to end-of-fiber, if desired.

188 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Analyzing Measurements

To analyze measurements:
1. In the Measurements tab, select the measurements to analyze.

Note: You can analyze the multiple measurements of the unidirectional and
bidirectional OTDR file, only if the Plus option or trial option is activated in
the application.

2. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR, tab.

3. Under Measurement, select the corresponding button.

4. Select whether you want to keep the span start and end positions, or if
you want to reset them to zero.

5. Click OK.
Once the analysis is performed, the window is refreshed automatically.
Information such as IOR, Helix factor, splice loss threshold, reflectance
threshold, end-of-fiber threshold are analyzed.

Note: A->B and B->A are re-analyzed when a real bidirectional file is
re-analyzed.

Post-Processing Software 189

Working with OTDR Files
Using the Failed Items Filter

Using the Failed Items Filter

In order to quickly see which events are faulty, you can apply a specific
filter to show only the failed items.
To activate the failed item filter:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Event Table, select Show/Hide Details, then View Failed Items.

190 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Displaying Statistics for Measurements

Displaying Statistics for Measurements

When displaying matched measurements, it might be useful to view
statistics for them. The statistics are displayed for:
 Fibers (includes loss for splices, connectors and sections, reflectance
for connectors, and attenuation data for sections), which are displayed
on the far right of the Events Table tab.
 Events and Sections (includes event position, loss and reflectance,
section length, loss and attenuation), which are displayed at the
bottom of the Events Table tab.
The statistics displayed are the minimum value, the maximum value, and
an average for the selected files. If you click on the minimum and
maximum values, the corresponding event is highlighted in the Graph or
Linear views, and in the events table.

Note: You must have enabled the corresponding item for the statistic to appear.
For example, if you chose not to display the positions, the corresponding
statistic is also hidden.

To display the statistics:

1. Select the multiple measurements for which you want to view the
statistics.
2. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
3. Under Event Table, select Show/Hide Details, then select the type of
statistics you want to view.

Post-Processing Software 191

Working with OTDR Files
Setting Span Positions with Absolute Lengths

Setting Span Positions with Absolute Lengths

The application allows you to set the span start and span end positions
using definite values.
To set the span positions:
1. In the Measurements window, select the measurements for which you
want to set the span.
2. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR ribbon tab.
3. Under Measurement, select the corresponding button.

4. Set the launch fiber length as required. Once you set the launch fiber
length, the application updates the span start position and span length
value based on the new position of the span start. If no event is present
at the new position of the span start, it automatically creates a new
event.

192 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Setting Span Positions with Absolute Lengths

5. Select whether you want to enter the span length or the receive fiber
length, then enter the appropriate value. The other value is updated
automatically according to the value you have entered. If no event is
present at the new position of the span end then, it automatically
creates a new event.

6. Click OK to save the change or Cancel to discard it.

Note: When a new event is created, the exact event position, event type, and
measured values are automatically determined to have the best
characterization for the most probable event present in the area. When a
new event is successfully created, the event is marked with an asterisk (*).

Note: If the origin of the selected file does not allow modification, an error
message is displayed.

Post-Processing Software 193

Working with OTDR Files
Setting the IOR Value by Distance

Setting the IOR Value by Distance

The application allows you to modify the IOR value for each selected
measurement by modifying the distance from span start to span end.
To modify the IOR value:
1. On the Measurements tab select the measurements you want to
modify.
2. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
3. Under Measurement, select the corresponding button.

4. Enter the distance of span start to span end.

Note: When the distance values from the selected measurements are not the
same, the values are displayed with a semicolon. Once the new IOR values
are calculated, the values related to the position and distance and the
OTDR graph are updated.

5. Click OK to save the changes or Cancel to discard them.

194 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Changing the Fiber Core Size (Plus Mode)

Changing the Fiber Core Size (Plus Mode)

The FastReporter 3 application displays the core size of the fiber for the
selected measurement in the Test Settings table of the Summary tab.
When multiple measurements are selected and the fiber core sizes are not
similar, they are separated with a semicolon.

Note: The application allows you to change the fiber core size only for the
multimode files.

To change the fiber core size:

1. On the Measurements tab, select the multimode measurement for
which you want to modify the fiber core size.
2. From the Summary tab, select the required fiber core size in the list of
available values.

3. The application prompts you to confirm the change. Click Yes to set the
default values for result and test settings. If you click No, the fiber core
size value changes, but the default values are not applied for result and
test settings.

Note: You cannot perform this operation if the origin of the selected file does not
allow modifications. For example, you cannot perform this operation on
“Telcordia 100" files from other OTDR manufacturers.

Post-Processing Software 195

Working with OTDR Files
Changing the Fiber Core Size (Plus Mode)

Note: You can revert the changes to factory settings by selecting the Revert To
Factory Settings button if you do not want to continue with the changes
done.

196 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Reverting to File Test Settings

Reverting to File Test Settings

The application allows you to revert the test settings parameters values to
the file original values. The retrieved values are IOR, backscatter, Helix
factor, splice loss threshold, reflectance threshold, end-of-fiber threshold
and fiber core size. The result values are automatically updated to reflect
the change.

Note: You can revert to file test settings for multiple files only if the Plus option is
activated.

Note: You cannot use this feature when you open SOR files that are not tested on
the EXFO devices and iOLM generated SOR files.

To revert to file test settings:

1. On the Files tab select the OTDR files you want to modify.
2. From the Summary tab, click the Revert to File Test Settings button,
then confirm your choice.

Post-Processing Software 197

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

FastReporter 3 can be used to analyze bidirectional OTDR files, and create
them using unidirectional files and combining them.

Analyzing Bidirectional Measurements

If two OTDR measurements were acquired in opposite directions on the
same fiber span, you can use the Create Bidirectional Files tool to match
the corresponding events. FastReporter 3 performs a bidirectional analysis
and generates an event table with the averaged loss for each event; that is,
the average of the losses obtained from both directions.
Bidirectional analysis is the recommended method for splice loss
measurements on singlemode fibers by the Telecommunications Industry
Association (test procedure EIA/TIA FOTP-61 Measurement of Fiber or
Cable Attenuation Using an OTDR).
This method removes the so-called “gainers” (increase in the optical
power) and exaggerated losses and provides accurate measurements. This
analysis is particularly useful to test the quality of a link, especially if it
comprises several sections with different types of fibers or fiber from
different manufacturers.
Gainers and exaggerated losses result from the joining of two fibers of
different mode-field diameters (MFD). The mode-field diameter of a fiber
corresponds to the size of the area where light is dispersed across its core
and cladding.
Mismatch of MFDs will contribute to differences in back reflected signals
that are not related to the loss at the splice point, that is to the true loss
seen in transmission. In this case, a unidirectional OTDR measurement will
show an apparent increase (gainer) or decrease (exaggerated loss) in
signal, depending on the direction of measurement.
Bidirectional averaging of OTDR splice loss measurements provides the
most accurate splice loss results.

198 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

Creating Bidirectional Measurement Files

You can combine unidirectional measurements into a bidirectional
measurement file. It is possible to use both single-wavelength and
multi-wavelength measurements. FastReporter 3 matches the
wavelengths.
The A->B and B->A measurement files must respect the following criteria:

Item To be Valid
Pulse width Must be identical for both measurement files.
Fiber types Use only measurements acquired using
singlemode fibers.
Wavelengths Must be identical for both measurements.
Measurement file Both must be unidirectional files.

To create bidirectional files in FastReporter 3, you must first match A->B

files with B->A files. For information on file matching, see Matching Files
on page 55. Changes made to event matching tolerances will affect
bidirectional event table results.

Post-Processing Software 199

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

To create a bidirectional file:

1. Select two matched OTDR files of opposite directions.
2. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
3. Under Tools, select the corresponding button.

4. Select the location where you want to save the bidirectional file.

200 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

5. Select the desired file naming options.

 Select A->B filename or B->A filename to use the selected A->B
or B->A file name.
 Select Autonaming to enter a prefix and a suffix to create the file
name.

Post-Processing Software 201

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

6. Select which documentation will be used for the bidirectional

measurement.

202 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

7. Select whether you want to keep the original unidirectional files in your
project once the bidirectional files are created.

8. Click OK.

Note: Bidirectional (.bdr) files do not support multiple wavelengths in the same
file. When you save the bidirectional files, separate files will be created for
each wavelength. The wavelengths are automatically added.

Post-Processing Software 203

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

Creating Unidirectional Files From a Bidirectional

File
Using FastReporter 3, you can take a bidirectional file and extract the two
unidirectional files that were originally used to create it. The resulting files
will have the same name as the bidirectional one, but with the direction
automatically added.
To extract the unidirectional files:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Import/Export, select Export - Create OTDR Unidir File.

3. If desired, select where you want to save the extracted files. The
default location is where the original bidirectional file is located.

4. Select the format for the extracted files.

204 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

5. Select whether you want to open the files in the application.

6. Select whether you want to keep the original bidirectional files in your
project.

7. Click OK to extract the files and return to the main window.

Managing Unidirectional Markers Within a

Bidirectional File
Bidirectional files are made of two separate traces in opposite directions.
In FastReporter 3, you can see and manage the markers for each A->B and
B->A traces. This allows you to calculate loss, ORL and other values for
each unidirectional trace.
To access the unidirectional markers for a bidirectional file:
1. Open the desired bidirectional file.
2. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR ribbon tab.
3. If required, switch to the Graph display, as explained in To select the
viewing method: on page 135.

Post-Processing Software 205

Working with OTDR Files
Managing Bidirectional OTDR Files (Plus Mode)

4. Under Event Table, select Bidir. details.

5. In the Event Table tab, select the A->B or B->A event for which you
want to manage the markers.

6. In the Markers tab, modify the marker as needed. For more

information, see Managing Markers on page 174.

206 FastReporter 3
 Working with OTDR Files
Creating Batch Documentation

Working with Virtual Bidirectional Files

Virtual bidirectional files are a way to preview the resulting measurement
when you select two matching unidirectional measurements without going
through the process of fully creating the bidirectional file. The display in the
graph and linear views, and the Event Table tab are the same as they
would if you are viewing an actual bidirectional measurement. The order
of display for the events depend of the A -> B measurement.
To activate the virtual bidirectional file mode:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under View, select Graph Options, then Display Virtual OTDR Bidir.

Creating Batch Documentation

FastReporter 3 includes a tool that can be used to batch document or
analyze large numbers of OTDR test files. All identification information,
with the exception of fiber ID, is copied from the reference file to the
selected files. The automated documentation tool can also be used to
automatically assign fiber IDs to selected files.
For details on using the automated documentation tool, see Adding and
Removing Measurement Files on page 47.

Post-Processing Software 207

 Saving an OTDR File in a New File Format
You can save OTDR measurement files in a new file format.
To save OTDR files in a new file format:
1. In the Measurement or Files window, select the OTDR file or files that
you want to save.
2. Select the File ribbon tab, then Save As, and Selected Files As.
3. When saving a single file, type a name for the file in the File name box.
OR
When saving multiple files, click on the Save As dialog box and
select an output folder on the Browse for Folder dialog box.
4. In the Save as type list, select the appropriate file format.
5. Click Save.

Note: Some file formats (for example, Telcordia and FTB-300) do not support
multiple wavelengths in the same file. When saving to those formats,
separate files will be created for each wavelength.

IMPORTANT
If you save an OTDR file in an older format than it was originally in,
you will lose the type of data that is not supported by the older file
format.
 Working with OTDR Files
Modifying Space Between Traces on the Graph

Modifying Space Between Traces on the Graph

For easier viewing of the traces appearing on the graph, you can increase
or decrease the vertical space between each of them.
To increase or decrease the space between the traces:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OTDR tab.
2. Under Y Spacing, select the buttons to increase or decrease the space
between the traces.

Button Action
Activates Y spacing.

Increases spacing.

Decreases spacing.

Removes spacing.

Post-Processing Software 209

Working with OTDR Files
Modifying Space Between Traces on the Graph

An indicator on the left of the graph shows that an offset is applied.

If you are using a keyboard and mouse, you can press and hold the Shift
key to select the trace, then use the arrow buttons, or the mouse to drag it
to the desired location.

210 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Accepted File Formats

6 Working with iOLM files

Accepted File Formats
FastReporter 3 lets you work with measurement files saved in the following
formats, but does not necessarily permit all operations on them.

File Format File Extension Display Modification Reanalysis

iOLM .iolm   
.iolmcfg   

.iolmbdr   

Note: The iOLM files also include the CWDM and DWDM formats.

Understanding the Link View

The iOLM Link View is an intuitive representation, which combines several
measurement results and values into a single view.
The link view is divided into two different regions.
 Link overview
 Link composition

Link Overview

Link
Composition

In the link overview, you can quickly see the status for each element with
the corresponding color code:

Post-Processing Software 211

Working with iOLM files
Understanding the Link View

 Red: The element is fail.

 Green: The element is pass.
 Blue: The element is not tested for Pass/Fail.
The pass/fail status also depends on the threshold values specified. The
link overview representing all the elements discovered on the link is
described below.

Selected Beginning of Visible region End of the Link Length of the

element the link measured link

 Length of the measured link: Length of the measured link excluding

the launch and receive fibers.
 Selected element: Rectangle representing the selected element.
 Visible region: The colored background represent the visible region in
the link composition view.
 Beginning of the link: Beginning of the link under test.
 End of the link: End of the link under test.
Elements before A and after B are referred to as out-of-span elements.
Elements out of the span are not tested for pass/fail status, but can have
diagnostics on them. If the launch fiber is not defined, the element marked
as "A" will not be tested for pass/fail and if the receive fiber is not defined,
the element marked as "B" will not be tested for pass/fail.

212 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Understanding the Link View

The link composition is described below.

Diagnostics Icon Splitter ratio Element Position Distance Unit

Pass/Fail Element Element Selected Navigation

not tested Fail Icon Pass/Fail Element Arrow

 Element position: The distance of the element from the beginning of

the link under test.
 Navigation arrow: The navigation arrow is only displayed when more
items are available on the particular side. It indicates that the you have
to scroll to view those items. This arrow can also appear on the left
side.
 Selected element: The gray background represents the currently
selected element.
 Letter A: The beginning of the link under test.
 Letter B: The end of the link under test.

Note: An arrow ( ) icon is displayed on the element if the start and the end of
the link is represented by the same element.

Post-Processing Software 213

Working with iOLM files
Understanding the Link View

 Element Pass/Fail: The status of the element whether it is pass ( ), fail

( ), or unknown. If you are viewing multiple measurements in Cable
view (see Managing Multiple Measurements on page 215 for details),
the status depends on the statuses of the corresponding matched
elements. If at least one of the elements has a fail status, then the cable
combined element status is also fail.
 Pass/Fail not tested: A gray background indicates that the element is
unknown. If there is no icon at the right side corner, it indicates that
thresholds are not applied on the element and the element is not
tested for Pass/Fail. If you are viewing multiple measurements in Cable
view (see Managing Multiple Measurements on page 215 for details),
the status depends on the statuses of the corresponding matched
elements. If at least one of the elements has a status of fail, then the
combined element status is also fail. If the statuses are a combination
of pass and unknown, then the cable combined element status is set to
unknown.
 Diagnostics icon: This icon specifies that some diagnostic is present
on the element. See Understanding Diagnostics on page 294 for more
details.
 Distance Unit: The distance unit you have selected.
 Splitter Ratio: The splitter ratio is displayed on the element, if the
element type is splitter.

Note: The number of elements displayed in the composition view varies

according to the available space, number of elements, and section size.

Note: When the link length is large, not all of the elements are visible; you may
need to scroll on the link using the navigation arrow.

Note: The distance between the elements is not 100 % proportional. To have a
proportional representation of the element, look at the link overview.

214 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Multiple Measurements

Managing Multiple Measurements

When you are working with more than one measurements, you can view
the links in two different manners:
 The Cable view shows all of the measurements grouped into one link,
with the link overview. The total number of selected fibers is indicated
on the left, and each element has its own identification number. When
matched elements are of the same type, you can see how many there
are on the upper left corner of the element icon. If the number is blue,
all fibers contain this element. If the number is yellow, at least one fiber
does not have this element. If elements at the same position are not of
the same type, a question mark icon replaces the element type.

Post-Processing Software 215

Working with iOLM files
Managing Multiple Measurements

 The Fiber view shows the grouped links at the top of the window, then
details each fiber with its corresponding elements. You can perform
changes to individual fibers in this view.

Note: When viewing grouped fibers, the End of fiber element (B) is set according
to the reference measurement if there is one; if there is no reference
measurement it is set according to the shortest fiber. The elements located
between the grouped A and B positions (including both A and B) are
numbered.

You can perform the same actions (adding, modifying and deleting
elements, setting span start and end) on single fiber and multiple fibers;
the main difference is that if you perform the actions in the cable view or
on the cable at the top of the Fiber view, all of the included fibers are
modified accordingly.
To select the viewing method for multiple fibers:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Under View, select the method you want to use.

216 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Selecting Element Alignment Type

Selecting Element Alignment Type

Elements can be matched either using the position (the distance on the
fiber), or the element number. The span start is considered as element
number 1, or the start position.

Note: Some operations, such as delete, add, and add to other measurements are
not available when the elements are matched by number.

To select the element alignment type:

1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Click Settings.

3. Select the General tab.

Post-Processing Software 217

Working with iOLM files
Selecting Element Alignment Type

4. Select how the elements will be matched.

5. Click OK.

218 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying Tolerance and Bidirectional Settings

Modifying Tolerance and Bidirectional

Settings
You can allow the creation of iOLM bidirectional files for your analyses.
You can also set the extended element matching tolerance. The main
purpose to edit the tolerance is to match two elements that are not
matching with the intrinsic element tolerance value fixed by signal
processing.
To enable the iOLM bidirectional file creation:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Click Settings.

3. Select the General tab.

Post-Processing Software 219

Working with iOLM files
Modifying Tolerance and Bidirectional Settings

4. Enable the Display iOLM bidirectional file creation dialog option.

5. Click OK.
To change the extended element matching tolerance:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Click Settings.

3. Select the Tolerance tab.

220 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying Tolerance and Bidirectional Settings

4. Enter the tolerance value to match the element.

5. To save your settings, click OK.

Note: If you want to apply the default settings, click Default Settings.

Post-Processing Software 221

Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

Modifying iOLM Thresholds

The types of thresholds that you can view and modify are link and element.

Note: Since you cannot have splitters in multimode measurements and

bidirectional measurements, the corresponding threshold table will not
appear in the tab if you are working with this type of file. This also applies if
you have selected both monomode and multimode files.

Changing Pass/Fail Thresholds

You can change the pass/fail threshold values for a specific, or all
wavelengths at a time.
You can also change the threshold values for the current measurement.
To change iOLM Pass/Fail Thresholds:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Click Settings.

222 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

3. Click the Pass/Fail Thresholds tab.

Post-Processing Software 223

Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

4. Select how you want to set the thresholds:

 If you want to use the threshold values from the measurement file,
select the corresponding option.

224 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

 If you want to use the threshold values from the application,

proceed as follows:
Select if you want to use thresholds associated with specific
certification standards, or you can set a custom configuration.

Note: You can use both certification standards and custom configurations at the
same time.

Post-Processing Software 225

Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

If you are using a custom configuration, select how you want to set
the thresholds:
Select if you will use fixed link loss thresholds or a dynamic loss
budget (in the case of iCERT files) or both. The threshold values
that you can modify will change accordingly in the table. If the
measurements include a dynamic loss value, it will appear in the
table.

226 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

In the case of iCERT files, select the fiber type used in the setting. If
you have selected a specific fiber type, not all fiber types may be
available.

Select one or several wavelengths to modify. If you do not see the

wavelength you want to use, you can add it by clicking the
button, entering the wavelength value, and clicking OK.

Post-Processing Software 227

Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

Modify the thresholds associated with the wavelengths needed, by

clicking in the desired threshold value and modifying it in the table.
The Apply option must be enabled for the threshold to be active
and modifiable.

If you have selected more than one wavelength, their maximum

and minimum link loss, as well as maximum attenuation will be
modified at the same time.
5. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
apply the changes and close the window, click OK.
6. Select the Advanced Bidir Settings button, and then select the
required option from the Advanced Bidir Settings window that
appears.
Refer Page 231 to know the details of the advanced Bidir settings.

Note: When the span ORL value is preceded by a “<” and the ORL threshold is
smaller than or equal to the value, the global pass/fail status for the
measurement will be unknown or fail.

228 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

Setting Pass/Fail Thresholds for the Current

Measurements
Depending on the type of threshold you have selected for your files, you
can adjust some of the values on the current measurements to better fit
your needs.

Note: You can use one or several of the types at a same time.

 Fixed link thresholds: this setting will use the link pass/fail threshold
value, the maximum link length and link loss value as the thresholds.
 Dynamic loss budget: this setting will use the link pass/fail threshold
value, and the fiber attenuation, as well as the splice loss and
connector loss values as the thresholds. The first and last connectors
will also be used in the calculation.
 Certification standards: this setting allows you to determine which
certification standards will be taken into account for the cabling or the
application.
To modify the iOLM thresholds for the current measurement:
1. Open an iOLM file.
2. Select the measurements for which you want to view or modify the
thresholds.
The current pass/fail threshold statuses are indicated in the list: green
for pass and red for fail.

Post-Processing Software 229

Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

3. In the Results window, select the Thresholds tab.

4. Select the type of budget you want to use for the results.

5. Select the wavelengths for which you want to view or modify the
maximum and minimum loss, and maximum attenuation loss values,
then change the values as needed.

230 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

6. Enable the element pass/fail thresholds option to be able to modify

them and apply them, then change the values as needed. Depending
on the element type, this list will display different items (for example, if
you are using standard splitters, the maximum splitter loss for 1:n will
be in the list, whereas if you are using unbalanced splitters, you will
see the ratios included in your measurement according to the
corresponding splitters and ports).

Note: If you are using the application threshold settings (as opposed to the
measurement file settings), you can still change the unbalanced splitter
values and custom element thresholds.

Post-Processing Software 231

Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

7. If the files are iCERT, you can select one or more certifications, as
explained in the procedures following this one. This will display the
threshold values associated with this particular type of certification.
You cannot modify the thresholds displayed for them.
If no certification is available, the configuration name is set to Custom,
and you can modify the thresholds as needed by clicking the
corresponding Apply box, then modifying the value in the table.

Note: If you have selected more than one or all wavelengths, all selected will be
modified simultaneously.

8. If you want to change the splitter loss ratio values, proceed in the same
manner as you have for the thresholds.
9. If you want to apply the default values for all thresholds and standards,
click Default Settings.
To apply advanced Bidir setting:
1. Select the required iOLM Bidir measurement file or files to apply
advanced settings.
2. Select the Thresholds tab, then click the Advanced Bidir Settings
button.

232 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

3. Select the options from the settings window and then select OK.
The Pass/Fail status of the selected Bidir files will be updated
accordingly.

Note: Select the Default Settings button to revert the modified advanced settings.
It will reset the values to the original values and its status.

Post-Processing Software 233

Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

To apply specific certification standards:

1. Select the file or files for which you want to apply standards.
2. Select the Thresholds tab, then click Select Standards.

3. Navigate in the application and cabling standard lists to select the

items you need. Use the + button to show the detailed available
choices.

234 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

4. If you want to see the threshold details for a specific standard, select it,
then use the Details button at the bottom of the window.

Click OK when you are done to return to the list of standards.

5. Once you are done, click OK to confirm the addition of the standards.
The tab is updated accordingly.

Post-Processing Software 235

Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

To select and modify the custom thresholds:

1. Select the file or files for which you want to change the threshold type.
2. Select the Thresholds tab, then the custom thresholds option.

3. Select the wavelengths for which you want to modify threshold values.
Select All to modify the threshold values of all available wavelengths.

4. Change the threshold values as needed.

236 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Thresholds

Note: If the unit used to take the measurements was not a Fiber Certifier (iCERT
model), you cannot select the dynamic loss budget option or any of the
certification standards and the maximum dynamic loss value is not
displayed in the tab.

Post-Processing Software 237

Working with iOLM files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

To show the certification standards applied to a specific

measurement file:
In the Files tab, right-click on the measurement or measurements for
which you want to view the standard, and select Global Pass/Fail Status.
The result will appear in a tooltip. If you have selected more than one
measurements, the standards will be applied to all of them.

Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

The auto template lets you add and remove elements on links based on
their occurrence on the total group of selected links. You can set a
percentage value that will indicate whether an element should be added
or removed.
Once the auto template is used, you can analyze the results; if there are
issues with some of the elements, you can view them in a descriptive
summary.The auto template is particularly useful for obtaining uniformity
when testing many traces on a same fiber.
To enable and use the auto template in your project:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Under Measurement, select the corresponding button.

238 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

3. Enable the option to be able to set the preferences.

4. If you want to add elements, select the corresponding option and enter
the minimum percentage value of occurrences required to add the
element to the remaining links.

Post-Processing Software 239

Working with iOLM files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

5. If you want to remove elements, select the corresponding option and

enter the percentage value of occurrences under which the element
must fall to be remove it from the measurement.

6. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
apply the changes and close the window, click OK.
To apply auto template settings to the current measurements:
1. Open the measurements you want to include in the auto template
operation.
2. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
3. Under Measurement, select the corresponding button.

240 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

4. If you want to add elements, select the corresponding option and enter
the minimum value of occurrences required to add the element to the
remaining links.

5. If you want to remove elements, select the corresponding option and

enter the value of occurrences under which the element must fall to be
remove it from the measurement.

6. Click OK to confirm your choice and start the operation.

Note: The values modified in the window will not be kept for future applications
of the auto template. They are for the current measurements only.

Post-Processing Software 241

Working with iOLM files
Using the Auto Template (Plus Mode)

The elements will be added or deleted according to the Auto template

settings. The results will be updated in the Element Table. If some issues
occur during the process, a summary will indicate which element is
concerned.

242 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Result Settings (Plus Mode)

Modifying iOLM Result Settings (Plus Mode)

In the Summary tab you can view and modify the IOR and backscatter
value for your iOLM measurements.
To modify iOLM settings in the Summary tab:
1. Open an iOLM file.
2. Select the measurement for which you want to view or modify the
iOLM settings.
3. In the Results window, select the Summary tab.

Post-Processing Software 243

Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Result Settings (Plus Mode)

4. In the Results table you can see all the result components:
 Link length: Displays the Link length.
 Acquisition Status: Displays the status of the acquisition (taken
normally or interrupted).
 Link loss: Displays the Link loss for the indicated wavelength.
 Link ORL: Displays the Link ORL value for the indicated
wavelength.
 Analysis version: Displays the version of the application used to
analyze the link. If the measurement is analyzed with FastReporter
3, the analysis version is replaced by the FastReporter 3 version
number. This version is saved only if the file is saved. If the version
is not available, the field remains empty.
 Prop. Delay: Displays the propagation delay for the indication
wavelength.

Note: If the link ORL value is saturated (displayed with a < symbol), the test is
still performed to obtain a pass/fail status. However, you can only
determine that the status is fail and the pass status cannot be specified.

244 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying iOLM Result Settings (Plus Mode)

5. In the Test Settings table, modify the IOR and the Backscatter values
as needed.

Note: The values set for 1550 nm are automatically computed for other
wavelengths. You can only edit the IOR and backscatter values for the
1550 nm wavelength, even if other wavelengths are available in the
selected iOLM measurement.

Note: When the IOR value is changed, the position and length of the section will
be updated, and when the backscatter value is changed it triggers a
reanalysis of the whole link.

Note: You can revert the changes to factory settings by selecting the Revert To
Factory Settings button if you do not want to continue with the changes
done.

Post-Processing Software 245

Working with iOLM files
Modifying the Splitter Ratio Information

Modifying the Splitter Ratio Information

The Link Definition table displays the information about the expected
number of splitters on the link and their respective splitter ratio. You can
modify the splitter ratios so that they are no longer included in the pass/fail
calculation and have the application discover the ratios automatically.
The splint ratios are sequential, in the sense that if you set the first in
sequence to None, any subsequent splitter ratio is automatically set to
None as well.

Note: Link definition on an iOLM measurement is available for display, but it is in

read-only mode.

To modify the splitter ratio information:

1. Open an iOLM configuration file.
2. In the Results window, select the Summary tab.
3. You can view and modify the splitter ratio stage 1, 2, and 3 fields in the
Link Definition table.
4. Select 1:? if you know that a splitter is present, but you do not know its
splitter ratio. The iOLM discovers the splitter ratio automatically and the
element will not be tested for pass/fail.

Note: The splitter ratios are defined stage wise, depending on how they are
defined in the network.

246 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Modifying Identifier Labels (Plus Mode)

Modifying Identifier Labels (Plus Mode)

You can view and modify the identifier labels for your iOLM measurement
files.

Note: When multiple iOLM measurements are selected, you will see the
information for all selected measurements. If the values are the same, they
are displayed once; if not, they are separated by semicolons.

To modify the identifier labels:

1. Open an iOLM file.
2. Select the measurements for which you want to view or modify the
Identifier labels.
3. In the Results window, select the Identification tab.

4. Select the identifier from the list of available choices in the Identifiers
table to modify it. You can also rename the identifier by selecting it. As
needed, you can change the corresponding value.

Note: The identifiers label is not editable if the iOLM measurements are selected
with any other type of measurements such as CD or OTDR.

Note: When the Identifier label is selected as None, the values are not editable.

Post-Processing Software 247

Working with iOLM files
Changing Fiber Core Size (Plus Mode)

Changing Fiber Core Size (Plus Mode)

The FastReporter 3 application displays the core size of the fiber for the
selected measurement in the Test Settings table of the Summary tab.
When multiple measurements are selected and the fiber core sizes are not
similar, they are separated with a semicolon.

Note: The application allows you to change the fiber core size only for the
multimode files.

To change the fiber core size:

1. On the Measurements tab, select the multimode measurement for
which you want to modify the fiber core size.
2. From the Summary tab, select the required fiber core size in the list of
available values.

3. The application prompts you to confirm the change. Click Yes to set the
default values for result and test settings. If you click No, the fiber core
size value changes, but the default values are not applied for result and
test settings.

248 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Changing the iOLM Fiber Type

Changing the iOLM Fiber Type

When working with iOLM files, you can select a specific fiber type.
Different fiber types are available depending on the type of mode you are
working with (singlemode or multimode).
To change the fiber type:
1. Open the file or files you want to modify.

Note: You can only change the fiber type of multiple files if they are of the same
mode.

2. In the Summary tab, under Link Definition, use the corresponding

drop-down list to select the desired fiber type.

Post-Processing Software 249

Working with iOLM files
Changing the Number of Connections in the Link Definition

Changing the Number of Connections in the

Link Definition
You can modify the number of connections in the link to see the impact of
adding or removing connections on the dynamic loss budget thresholds.
The threshold status will be modified accordingly.
To change the number of connections:
1. Open the file or files you want to modify.
2. In the Summary tab, under Link Definition, click into the
corresponding box to enter the desired value.

Note: When you change the link definition parameters, the pass/fail thresholds
will be recalculated.

250 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Changing the Number of Splices in the Link Definition

Changing the Number of Splices in the Link

Definition
You can modify the number of splices in the link to see the impact of
adding or removing splices on the dynamic loss budget thresholds. The
threshold status will be modified accordingly.
If you are working with iCERT files, you can change the number used to
calculate the dynamic loss budget. If you have selected multiple iCERT files
or if there are more than one custom elements, you will see how many of
each are in the links.
To change the number of splices:
1. Open the file or files you want to modify.
2. In the Summary tab, under Link Definition, double-click into the
corresponding box to enter the desired value.

Post-Processing Software 251

Working with iOLM files
Changing the Number of Splices in the Link Definition

To change the number used to calculate the dynamic loss budget:

1. Open an iOLM file.
2. Under the Summary tab, select which custom element you want to
modify.

3. Change the value as needed.

252 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Elements

Managing Elements
When an element or a section is selected from the link view, the details of
the corresponding element or section are displayed in Elements Table tab.
The loss, reflectance, wavelength, and corresponding pass/fail status for
loss and reflectance will be displayed.
When you hover the mouse over any element, the application displays the
corresponding details of the element, such as: type, wavelengths, loss, and
reflectance.

Note: Inversely, if you select an item in the Elements Table tab, the corresponding
item is highlighted in the link view.

Note: Reflectance is not displayed if you hover the mouse over a non-reflective
element.

Post-Processing Software 253

Working with iOLM files
Managing Elements

When you hover the mouse over any element groups, the application
displays the group details separated by semicolons.

When you hover the mouse over any element with a diagnostic label, the
application displays the description.

Note: It is possible to underestimate the loss or reflectance value if the noise level
is too high (for instance, after a lot of loss on the link, the noise levels
increase). In that case, it is possible for the signal processing algorithms to
detect an element, and to estimate the loss/reflectance values, but since the
measured signal does not completely clear the noise floor, the loss or
reflectance values are likely to be underestimated. If the loss or reflectance
value is underestimated, the value is displayed with a > symbol.

254 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Elements

The elements that you could see on the link are described in the table
below:

Element
Element Name Element Description
Icon
Macrobend Displayed in the link view when more than one
wavelength is present in the measurement.
The macrobend will always be displayed as a failed
element.
Out of Range Displayed when the end of fiber could not be detected
by the module because the dynamic range is not large
enough.
Standard Passive fiber optic coupler that divides light from a single
Splitter fiber into two or more fiber channels. The splitter ratio is
displayed above the icon.
(Splitters are not available on multimode or bidirectional
files.)
Unbalanced Passive fiber optic coupler that divides light from a single
Splitter fiber into two or more fiber channels, but dividing the
light signal unevenly between two ports. The ratio can
vary.
 The top symbol indicates a splitter going through the
trunk cable.
 The middle symbol indicates a splitter going through
the output port.
 The bottom symbol indicates a coupler type splitter.

Splice Indicates the junction of two fiber sections having

different fiber backscatter characteristics.
Connector Used to join two fibers.

Mismatch The elements on a matching location in the link are not

of the same type.

Post-Processing Software 255

Working with iOLM files
Managing Elements

Element
Element Name Element Description
Icon
Fault No splitter was detected on the fiber. This element type
is always considered as a fault.
Switch The switch element is used for multifiber MPO switch
automated acquisitions.
Coupler A coupler port is an optical fiber device with one or more
input fibers and one or several output fibers.
Custom Can vary. An element that you will specify yourself. You can add
your own icon for this element.

256 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

Customizing the Elements Table Tab

When viewing measurements, you can customize what is displayed in the
Elements Table tab to better reflect what you want to see about the
elements, the sections, or both.
To customize the Elements Table tab:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Under Element Table, click Display Options, then select the items
you want to display.

Note: You can also right-click on the fixed column of the Elements/Section
Details tab and customize the view.

The corresponding view is displayed in the Elements Table tab.

Post-Processing Software 257

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

You can see the attributes below in the tab:

 Type: The type of element selected in the link view. You can modify the
element type by selecting it from the drop-down menu. If an element is
modified as a custom element, the name of the custom element
shows in the tool tip.
You can also change the splitter ratio if the selected element is a
splitter, including 2:N splitters if the measurement supports them.

Note: The items available in the list depend on the characteristics of the selected
element. It may not be possible to change the element type.

Note: If the type of an element is modified, an asterisk (*) is displayed in the Type
column.

 Position/Length: The position of the element on the link and section

length. Position 0.00 is set on the first element after the launch fiber.
 Loss (dB): The loss at different wavelengths.
 Reflectance (dB): The reflectance at different wavelengths.
 Attenuation (dB/km): The attenuation value for each wavelength.

Note: The attenuation detail is displayed for the section and the field is displayed
only when View Section Details is selected.

Viewing Grouped Elements

Link elements will be displayed as groups when the iOLM analysis detects
that several elements are too close to be independently characterized.
When this occurs, as much information as possible is displayed for each
individual sub-element. The pass/fail status is applied to each sub-element
whenever possible, and a global status is also displayed for the group.
Groups can also be displayed when a link element (such as a splitter) is
found to have wavelength dependant loss. In that case, the link element is
grouped with a macrobend element. In this particular case, there might not

258 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

be a physical macrobend next to the link element, but the macrobend icon
is used to highlight the presence of the wavelength dependent loss. When
elements are grouped, the group loss and group reflectance value is also
displayed in the Element tab.

Group

Each sub-element is directly displayed as if they were normal elements.

Note: For grouped elements, some values may not be available individually but
are available at the group level, such as loss and reflectance.

Note: If elements are grouped, the total group loss value is compared with the
addition of the thresholds defined for each element in the group. If the total
group loss value is greater than the addition of the thresholds defined for
each element in group, the grouped element will show a fail status. You
can individually select grouped elements as any other standalone element.
When elements are grouped at the beginning of the link, icon A is displayed
on one of the sub-elements. When elements are grouped at the end of the
link, icon B is displayed on one of the sub-elements.

Post-Processing Software 259

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

Grouping Unbalanced Splitter

You can group the unbalanced splitter element with macrobend, splice, or
connector elements.
The macrobend/splice/connector elements can be grouped to the right
side or left side according to your need. Select the
macrobend/splice/connector and select the required left grouping or right
grouping icon.

Note: The right and left grouping icons will be enabled according to the position
of these macrobend/splice/connector with respect to the unbalanced
splitter.

260 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

Ungrouping Unbalanced Splitter Group

You can ungroup the unbalanced splitter group according to your
requirement. To ungroup the unbalanced splitter connected group, select
the group which you want to ungroup, and then select the Ungrouping
icon.

Note: You can group/ungroup the unbalanced splitter and the

macrobend/splice/connector elements by right clicking these elements and
then selecting the Group/Ungroup menu.

Post-Processing Software 261

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

Importing/Exporting the CSV file to create/update

the iOLM Config file
You can create and update the iOLM Config file for the unbalanced splitter
by importing the required configurations in the CSV format.
This will allow you to create unbalanced splitter of your choice and define
them in the topology instead of using currently defined unbalanced
splitters.
If you do not have the required CSV file format, create a blank CSV file for
the selected iOLM Config file by using the Export CSV icon in the
Unbalanced Splitter section. You can also update the existing config file in
CSV format and update the values.
The new or updated CSV file for the unbalanced splitter - iOLM Config file,
can be imported using the Import CSV to update the required Config file.
This imported (updated) Config file then can be utilized in the iOLM
application to modify and update the unbalanced splitter element values.

Note: The imported values from the CSV will also update the unbalanced splitter
elements in the Unbalanced Splitter section.

262 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

Adding Elements
The application allows you to add elements in iOLM and iOLM Bidir files in
the link view by selecting any element or section.
You can add elements in both the Fiber and Cable views as well as the
Elements Table tab. Adding an element to the cable (whether you do it in
Cable view, or on the cable at the top of the Fiber view) adds it to all of the
fibers. You can also take one element from one fiber and add it to the other
fibers.
The added element supports the following scenarios depending on the
distance or position of the element:
 The new element is added in a section of the link between two existing
elements.
 The new element is added as a sub element in existing element group.
 The new element is added as a sub element to a single element to
create a new element group.

Note: You cannot add any element before Element A or after Element B.

Note: You cannot add splitters on multimode or bidirectional measurements.

Post-Processing Software 263

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

To add an element:
1. Open an iOLM or iOLM bidir file.
2. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM ribbon tab.
3. Under Measurement, click the corresponding button.

4. Select whether the new element will be located before or after the
element you have selected. If you are adding an element to a section,
indicate the position of the element.

Element Section

5. Select the type of the new element as required.

Element Section

Note: You can change the splitter ratio to 2:N, if the measurement supports it.

Note: The splitter element type is not available for iOLM bidirectional files.

264 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

6. Click OK to apply the changes or Cancel to discard them.

Note: If an element is added, an asterisk (*) is displayed in the Position and Type
columns.

Note: When an element is added to another element with no sub-elements, the

current element will become a merged/group element. You can view the
details in the Elements Table tab.

Note: When you add an element to a group of elements, it impacts the pass/fail
status of the grouped elements.

To add an existing element to other fibers:

1. Select the element you want to add.
2. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM ribbon tab.
3. Under Measurement, click the corresponding button.

Note: The application displays a warning message when the element cannot be
inserted at the specified location.

Note: The Add to Other Measurement feature is not available if you cannot use
it (for example, if you are trying to use it while being in Cable view, and that
the element is already present in all of the fibers).

Post-Processing Software 265

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

Modifying Element Types

You can view and modify element types that you see in the link view. You
can change the type while being in either Fiber view or Cable view, as well
as the Elements Table tab. Changes done in the Cable view or on the cable
at the top of the Fiber view are done on each fiber included in the cable.

Note: For iOLM bidirectional files and multimode files, the splitter element type is
not available.

Note: You cannot modify the type of the element if they are out of range or if they
are macrobends.

Note: If an element type is changed, an asterisk (*) is displayed in the Type

column.

Note: The items available in the list depend on the characteristics of the selected
element. It may not be possible to change the element type.

You can edit the properties for iOLM elements and sections. Event
properties that cannot be edited are shaded.
To edit iOLM element properties:
1. Click on the element or section for which you want to change the
properties.
2. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM ribbon tab.
3. Under Measurement, click the corresponding button.

266 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

4. Modify the properties as needed. The editable values are shown in a

white background.

Note: The comment that you enter in the Comments field is displayed as a tooltip
when you hover the mouse pointer over the element in the graph area and
element table.

5. Click OK to confirm your changes.

Post-Processing Software 267

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

Deleting Elements
The application allows you to delete the manually added elements as well
as the elements found by analysis. You can delete the elements either the
Fiber view, the Cable view, or the Element Table tab, the procedure is the
same. An element removed from the Cable or on the cable at the top of the
Fiber view is removed from all fibers included in the cable.
The application does not allow you to delete the following type of
elements:
 Splitters 1:N and 2:N
 First connector
 End of fiber
 Out of range
 Link start element
 Link end element
To delete an element:
1. Open an iOLM file.
2. Select the element or elements which you want to delete.
3. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM ribbon tab.
4. Under Measurement, click the corresponding button.

5. A confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes to continue or No to

cancel it.

268 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

Managing Custom Elements

On a given link topology, it is possible to have different types of splices,
connectors, unbalanced splitter and other kinds of elements. For this
reason FastReporter 3 lets you create custom elements as per your
requirements. You can also configure the details such as pass/fail
thresholds.
The application allows you to add, modify or delete custom elements in
the test configuration. You can also add the custom element in the iOLM
configuration file and apply it to the selected measurement.
You can add custom elements of two types: splice or connector. Each
custom element must have its unique name.

Note: When more than one iOLM measurements are selected, the new custom
element will be added to the test configuration in all selected
measurements.

Note: When more than one iOLM measurements are selected, the application
displays all custom elements included in the test configuration for each
iOLM measurement selected.

Post-Processing Software 269

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

To add a custom element:

1. Open an iOLM file.
2. Click on Custom Elements under the Summary tab.

3. Click in to add a new custom element.

270 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

4. Enter a name for the element.

5. Select the custom element type. from the drop-down. You have to
provide a unique name for the type of element you select.

Note: The Unbalanced Splitter custom element is available only for the
singlemode and the unidirectional test result only.

6. If you want to select a different icon to represent the custom element,

use the ... button to locate and select your image, then press Open to
confirm your choice.

Post-Processing Software 271

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

7. Press OK to save the changes and close the dialog box, or press Cancel
to exit without saving.
Once your custom elements are added, they become available in the list of
available element types. You can find information about changing the
element type in Modifying Element Types on page 266.
The application allows you to view the pass/fail threshold for each custom
element of the test configuration even if the Plus option is not activated. If
multiple iOLM measurements are selected, the application displays the
pass/fail threshold for each custom element included in each test
configuration of the selected iOLM measurements.
If the same custom element is included in more than one iOLM
measurements and the threshold values are different, the application
displays all different threshold values separated with a semicolon.

Note: You can edit the loss pass/fail thresholds for each custom element only
when the Plus option or the trial is activated.

272 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

To modify a custom element:

1. Open an iOLM file.
2. Click on Custom Elements under the Summary tab.

3. Click on the custom element name under the Element Name column
and modify it as needed.

Note: If the element is in use, you cannot modify it.

4. Press OK to save the changes and close the dialog box, or press Cancel
to exit without saving

Post-Processing Software 273

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

To delete the custom element:

1. Open an iOLM file.
2. Click on Custom Elements under the Summary tab.

3. Select the custom element that you want to delete.

4. Press to delete the custom element.

Note: If the element is in use, you cannot modify it.

274 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

Setting Launch and Receive Fibers on Elements

You can change Link Start Element (A) and Link End Element (B) on the
link. The application also allows you to change the launch fiber length and
receive fiber length on both new and existing elements. If no element is
located in this position, a new element is created.
You can set the launch and receive fibers in both Fiber and Cable views, as
well as the Elements Table tab. However, if you are setting them in Cable
view, or on the cable at the top of the Fiber view, the operation must be
possible on all of the fibers included in the cable.
To set the Launch fiber and Receive fiber on an existing element:
1. Open the iOLM file.
2. Select the element that you want to set as the launch/receive fiber
element from the link or fiber views.
3. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM ribbon tab.
4. Under Measurement, click the corresponding buttons.

Post-Processing Software 275

Working with iOLM files
Customizing the Elements Table Tab

To change the launch fiber and receive fiber positions:

1. Open the iOLM file.
2. Enter the launch fiber length and receive fiber length in the Test
Settings table under the Summary tab.

When the launch fiber length and receive fiber length are changed, a
partial analysis is performed. In this partial analysis, the values for link
length, link loss, link ORL, element position, element section length, and
diagnostics are recalculated. This partial analysis does not change the
elements you have added or the elements you have changed in the link.

Note: If the entered launch fiber length and receive fiber length are not valid, the
application prompts an error message. If no element is present at the
position, then a new element is automatically inserted in that place.

Note: If a macrobend is set either as link start or link end, a new connector is
added and that element will be set as link start or link end.

276 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Analyzing Measurements (Plus Mode)

Analyzing Measurements (Plus Mode)

You can recalculate the acquisition results. However, when the trace is
analyzed, the manually added elements will be removed from the link and
the element details table is refreshed accordingly.

Note: You cannot analyze the unidirectional files created by the loop back
process.

To analyze measurements:
1. In the Measurements tab, select the measurements to analyze.
2. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
3. Under Measurement, select the corresponding button.

Using the Failed Element Filter

In order to quickly see which measurements are faulty, you can apply a
specific filter to show only the failed element.
To activate the failed elements filter:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Under Element Table, select Display Options, then the corresponding
option.

Post-Processing Software 277

Working with iOLM files
Generating (Exporting) a .sor File From iOLM Measurements (Plus Mode)

Generating (Exporting) a .sor File From iOLM

Measurements (Plus Mode)
With FastReporter 3, you can generate OTDR .sor files from iOLM files for
each measurement.
To generate an OTDR .sor file:
1. Select single or multiple iOLM files from the Files Window.
2. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
3. Under Tools, select the corresponding button.

OR Right click the file, go to Export, and then select the Export to
SOR/ASCII file option.

4. Select what you want to do with the resulting file:

 Export it to the desired location and open it.
 Export it to the desired location only.

278 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Generating (Exporting) a .sor File From iOLM Measurements (Plus Mode)

 Create a temporary file, kept in memory only. This is useful if you

want to create reports, for example.

Post-Processing Software 279

Working with iOLM files
Generating (Exporting) a .sor File From iOLM Measurements (Plus Mode)

5. If you choose to export the file, select a location for it.

6. Select the type of file you want to as the result of the export.

7. Click OK.

Note: If a .sor file with the same name already exists on disk, a confirmation
message is displayed to overwrite the existing file.

Note: The wavelength is automatically appended to the file name when the iOLM
measurement contains more than one wavelength.

Note: When you attempt to generate a .sor file and the iOLM measurement does
not contain the necessary intermediate OTDR measurement, the .sor file is
not generated.

280 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Generating (Exporting) a .sor File From iOLM Measurements (Plus Mode)

When an attempt to generate the .sor file is done and the iOLM acquisition
state is not completed or interrupted, the application prompts an error
message explaining the origin of the problem and the solution to avoid it.

Post-Processing Software 281

Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

You can create a new configuration file as well as apply configuration
settings to existing measurement files.

Creating Configuration File

The File menu allows you to create a configuration file and the created file
is saved in the configuration file list. You can customize this configuration
to fit your needs.
To create a configuration file:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Under Configuration, select the corresponding button.

3. Enter the desired file name in the Save As dialogue box and click Save.

282 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

4. In the Identification tab, enter the desired identifiers for your files, as
well as the auto-incrementation scheme you want to use.

5. In the Summary tab, select the various information for your test
settings and link information. Select the OTDR Port to a specific port if
required. If your files were acquired using an iCERT-enabled unit, you
can select the fiber type here. If your files were acquired with an
Optimode, you can select it here as well.
If you have two core sizes in your configuration, you can enter different
IOR and backscatter values for both.
Under Test Parameters, you can select whether you want to save the
reduced iOLM data. This option is used when working with TestFlow.

Post-Processing Software 283

Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

If you want to change the SOR pulse and acquisition time, click SOR
Pulse Editor, then enter the new Pulses (1st Trace, 2nd Trace, 3rd
Trace) according to the requirement. And also the Acquisition time
values to use. You can enter a specific value or select the required
values from the drop down list.

6. To set the wavelength, select the wavelengths ports SM (Singlemode)

and MM (Multimode) from the Wavelength drop down list, and then
select the required wavelengths (check boxes) available.

Note: The Wavelengths are available according to the OTDR Port value in the
Test Parameters section. If you want to select other port than available
options, modify the OTDR Port to Unspecified or to the required value.

Note: You can choose to set the pulses and acquisition time, and Wavelength to
“Auto” and let the application use the most appropriate pulse on the link.

Note: Select Default Settings button, if you want revert the values to default.

7. In the Thresholds tab, enter the threshold values according to your

needs. If you want to include specific certification standards for your
iCERT files, you can do it here.

284 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

8. Save your changes once you are done.

Post-Processing Software 285

Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

Applying Configuration Settings

You can use the settings of a configuration file, such as identifier labels and
thresholds, and apply them to a file you select in the list.
The configuration files are saved in the following location in your
computer:
C:\ProgramData\Exfo\FastReporter2\Standard\Configuration Files
To apply the configuration settings:
1. Select an iOLM file from the Files tab.
2. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
3. Under Configuration, select the corresponding button.

4. Select the desired configuration file, click Apply, and OK.

286 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

Note: If the configuration you want to use is not in the list, you can use the Import
button to add it.

Note: If the configuration file is TIA certification compliant, it will be indicated at

the beginning of the row.

Modifying Auto-Increment values You can set

auto-increment values for several items in your
iOLM measurement files.
To modify the auto-Increment values:
1. Open an iOLM configuration file.
2. Select the measurements for which you want to modify the auto
increment values.
3. In the Results window, select the Identification tab.

Post-Processing Software 287

Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

4. For each item that you want to include in the auto-increment process,
enable the Auto-Increment option.

5. Modify the start, stop, and step values for the items as needed.

Note: The step value must be smaller than the difference between the start and
stop values. If the start is greater than the stop, then the identifier value
begins decrementing by the specified step.

288 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

Enabling 2:N Splitters

The splitters of type 2:N can be used to create network redundancy. If a
network break occurs, you can still connect through the other network
branch. This ensures active communication while the repairing of the
broken network is in progress.

Note: The application allows you to use the 2:N splitter feature in the iOLM
configuration file and you can only use the 2:N splitter feature for splitter
ratio stage 1.

In the splitter ratio stage 1 field, if 1:? or None is selected and you enabled
the 2:N splitter option, the 1:? and None are replaced by a 2:2 splitter value.
To enable a 2:N splitter:
1. Open the iOLM configuration file.
2. From the Summary tab, enable the 2:N Splitter option.

Post-Processing Software 289

Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

3. Select the desired ratio for stages 1, 2 and 3.

In the iOLM file, you can view the 2:N splitter value in the Link composition,
and select the element type as 2:N splitter if the selected measurement
supports the 2:N splitter values.

Setting up Unbalanced Splitter Ratios

The splitters used to work on unbalanced PON networks divide the light
signal unevenly between two splitter ports. By default, the first splitter in a
sequence has a 1:8 ratio and is represented by 90/10.
This means that 90% of the light is going through the cable and continues to
the next splitter in the cascade of splitters along the cable. The other 10% is
used for either one or several customers under this specific splitter port.
The ratio of all splitters in the cascade can change (for example 80/20,
85/15) depending on the amount of light necessary for each customer.

290 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

You can have a sequence of 12 unbalanced splitters representing the

network you want to test, but it is also possible to use a standard splitter at
the beginning and at the end of the sequence of cascaded splitters. All
sequences of unbalanced splitters start from the CO/OLT (Central
Office/Optical Line Terminal).
To set up the ratio values for your unbalanced splitters:
1. Open the iOLM configuration file.
2. From the Summary tab, select the Unbalanced splitter type.

3. Click the now available Unbalanced Splitter button.

Note: If the Splitter type is selected as Unbalanced, the Unbalanced Splitter type
will be available while adding or modifying the Custom element.

Post-Processing Software 291

Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

4. Click to add a row below the currently selected one.

5. Select the ratio you want to use either by selecting a value in the list or
typing it directly.

292 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Configuration Files (Plus Mode)

6. Select the port to use for this ratio in the list of available values.

7. Add row as needed (up to 12 total).

8. Once you are done, click OK to close the window.

Post-Processing Software 293

Working with iOLM files
Understanding Diagnostics

Understanding Diagnostics
This section explains the diagnostics feature available in the intelligent
Optical Link Mapper application.
Diagnostics are used to provide additional information about detected
problems or ambiguous measurement situations, such as root cause
possibilities for the fail status of a link element. The diagnostics provide
help to troubleshoot faulty connectors, understand why link elements are
tagged as fail or unknown, indicate unexpected instrument or test
conditions and so forth.
Link elements with an associated diagnostic are marked with an i icon,
and the diagnostics are displayed in the Element tab. More than one
diagnostic can be associated with any given element.
If you are viewing multiple measurements in the Cable view and the
elements present an anomaly (for example, the elements are not of the
same type or do not have the same threshold values), you will notice a !
icon on the upper right-hand corner of the element instead.
Element diagnostics are associated with specific link elements issues.
Each failed link element will have associated diagnostics to assist in
troubleshooting. Some elements, such as macrobends, will have
associated diagnostics even with a pass status.
You can see the details about the diagnostics in the Elements Table tab.

294 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Viewing Power Meter Results

Viewing Power Meter Results

Power meter results are displayed in the OPM and PPM table. For more
details, see Viewing Power Meter Results on page 377.

Managing Bidirectional iOLM Files

FastReporter 3 allows you to view and create bidirectional iOLM files.
Selecting each unidirectional file or the resulting bidirectional file displays
the corresponding data in the Results window.

Creating a Bidirectional iOLM File

The application allows you to create a bidirectional iOLM file from two
matched iOLM measurements of opposite directions. You can create more
than one file at once, providing that each have their matching file.
The measurement files must meet the following criteria:
 The measurement lengths in both direction are the same.
 There are no splitters in the link elements.

Post-Processing Software 295

Working with iOLM files
Managing Bidirectional iOLM Files

To create a bidirectional iOLM file:

1. If you have not done so already, activate the iOLM bidirectional file
creation option, as explained in Modifying Tolerance and Bidirectional
Settings on page 219.
2. Select two matched iOLM files of opposite directions.
3. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
4. Under Tools, select the corresponding button.

5. Select the location where you want to save the bidirectional file.

296 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Bidirectional iOLM Files

6. Select the desired file naming options.

 Select A->B filename or B->A filename to use the selected A->B
or B->A file name.
 Select Identifiers to save the bidirectional file as per the matched
identifiers. The identifiers name is formed from the identifiers
order displayed in the Matched Files tab, separated by the
separating character you have selected.
 Select Autonaming to enter a prefix and a suffix to create the file
name.

Post-Processing Software 297

Working with iOLM files
Managing Bidirectional iOLM Files

7. Select which documentation will be used for the bidirectional

measurement.

298 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Bidirectional iOLM Files

8. Select which thresholds you will use in the bidirectional measurement.

Post-Processing Software 299

Working with iOLM files
Managing Bidirectional iOLM Files

9. If you want to keep the original unidirectional files open after creating
the bidirectional file, select the corresponding option.

300 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Managing Bidirectional iOLM Files

10. If you want bidirectional files created automatically using the current
settings, select Do not display the dialog. Any future bidirectional file
creation will use these settings.

Note: To enable the iOLM Bidirectional File Creation window again, follow the
instructions in Modifying Tolerance and Bidirectional Settings on page 219.

11. Click OK to save your settings.

Post-Processing Software 301

Working with iOLM files
Managing Bidirectional iOLM Files

Working with Virtual Bidirectional Files

Virtual bidirectional files are a way to preview the resulting measurement
when you select two matching unidirectional measurements without going
through the process of fully creating the bidirectional file. The display in the
link view, Threshold, Elements and Results tables are the same as they
would if you are viewing an actual bidirectional measurement. The order
of display for the elements depend of the A -> B measurement. Since this
is a viewing option only, you cannot perform operations such as adding or
removing elements when the virtual bidirectional mode is active.

Note: You cannot create bidirectional files with multimode measurements.

To activate the virtual bidirectional file mode:

1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Under View, select Graph Options, then the corresponding option.

302 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Viewing Elements Before A and After B

Viewing Bidirectional File Element Properties

You can view the information for a bidirectional element at a glance,
including both direction and the average.
To view the bidirectional file element properties:
1. Select the element for which you want to see the information.
2. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
3. Under Measurement, select the corresponding button.

Viewing Elements Before A and After B

You might want to see the elements before the link start and end, even if
they are not included in the calculations. You can select to see only the
elements before A, only those before B, or both.
To view the elements before A and after B:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM ribbon tab.
2. Under View, select Graph Options, then select the corresponding
options as needed.

Post-Processing Software 303

Working with iOLM files
Viewing Section Length for Multiple Measurements

Viewing Section Length for Multiple

Measurements
When multiple measurements are opened, the application displays the
section length on the graph. You can also choose to hide it.
To view or hide the section length:
1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Under View, select Graph Options, then select the corresponding
option.

Matching Link Elements Without a Reference

When multiple measurements are selected, the elements from different
measurements are matched according to their position (the position of the
elements can be slightly different). The application uses a algorithm with
tolerances to match these elements. For more information of setting the
tolerance, see Modifying iOLM Result Settings (Plus Mode) on page 243.
When no reference measurement is selected, all elements of the first
measurement are considered as the reference elements. In the remaining
traces, if some elements are not matching, they are also included as
reference elements.
Matching is always done from left to right in accordance with the element
location. If elements are present before the link start (A), the matching will
be done from right to left.

304 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Displaying Statistics for Matched Measurements

Displaying Statistics for Matched

Measurements
When displaying matched measurements, it might be useful to view
statistics for them. The statistics are displayed for:
 Fibers (includes loss, reflection and attenuation data for splices,
connectors and sections), which are displayed on the far right of the
Elements Table tab.
 Elements and Sections (includes for loss, reflection and attenuation
data for each wavelength for each event and sections), which are
displayed at the bottom of the Elements Table tab.
The statistics displayed are the minimum value, the maximum value, and
an average for the selected files. If you click on the minimum and
maximum values, the corresponding element is highlighted in the Fiber or
Cable views.

Note: In the case of Fiber statistics, the highlighted element is based on the loss
value.

Note: You must have enabled the corresponding item for the statistic to appear.
For example, if you chose not to display the positions, the corresponding
statistic is also hidden.

Post-Processing Software 305

Working with iOLM files
Displaying Statistics for Matched Measurements

To display the statistics:

1. Select the multiple measurements for which you want to view the
statistics.
2. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
3. Under Element Table, select Display Options, then the corresponding
option.

306 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Using the FTTx Mode

Using the FTTx Mode

If you are working with files that include splitter elements, the FTTx view
can help you better visualize your results. This type of view will invert the
links so that the results are displayed from event B to event A, that is, from
the optical network terminal (ONT) to the central office (CO).
In the Measurements tab, measurement files containing at least one
splitter element are identified by a mark in the FTTx column.

Note: While in FTTx mode, you cannot create bidirectional files, loopback files, or
generate application-based reports.

Post-Processing Software 307

Working with iOLM files
Using the FTTx Mode

To enable the FTTx mode:

1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Select Settings.

3. Select the General tab.

4. Enable the mode.

5. Click OK.

308 FastReporter 3
 Working with iOLM files
Using the FTTx Mode

To display the FTTx view:

1. If you have not done so already, select the iOLM tab.
2. Under View, select Graph Options, then select the corresponding
option.

The FTTx links will be identified with specific icons in the Link view,
and has its own tab in the result table.

Note: The FTTx Results table appears only if you select FTTx measurements. As
soon as you include a regular iOLM measurement, the tab will be hidden.

Post-Processing Software 309

7 Working with OFM Files
Accepted File Formats
FastReporter 3 lets you work with measurement files saved in different
formats, but does not necessarily permit all operations on them.

File Format File Extension Display Modification

OLX .olx  

Post-Processing Software 310

Working with OFM Files
Selecting Display Options for Elements Table

Selecting Display Options for Elements Table

You can select the parameters that needs to be displayed or hidden in the
Results section’s Element table.
To view/hide the parameters in the Elements table (Results > Elements
table), select/clear the Element Options or Header Options from the
Display options sub-menu.

311 FastReporter 3
 Working with OFM Files
Modifying Identifiers

Modifying Identifiers
You can modify the identifier’s properties for the selected measurement.
To know how to modify Identifiers, refer the Viewing and Sorting Files or
Measurements on page 505

Post-Processing Software 312

Working with OFM Files
Modifying Test Measurement Summary

Modifying Test Measurement Summary

You can modify the Test Settings and Test Parameters.
To modify the summary of test measurement:
1. Select the test measurement from the list in Files section.

Note: If the required test measurement is not available in the Files section,
browse and open the file from the main File menu.

2. The graphic format will be displayed if available for the selected test
measurement and the details of it appear in the Results section.
3. Select the Summary tab from the Results section.

4. Modify/Add the values for the Test Parameters and Test Settings.

Note: You cannot modify/add the grayed out parameter-values.

Note: The Revert to Factory Settings button will revert the changes to the default
settings.

313 FastReporter 3
 Working with OFM Files
Configuring thresholds

Configuring thresholds
You can change the thresholds and analyze the selected OFM test
measurements for the analysis:
To change OFM thresholds:
1. On the ribbon, select the OFM tab if it is not selected already.
2. Select the required measurement file(s)
3. In the Results table at the bottom, and then select the Thresholds tab.

4. Modify the Link pass/fail threshold values according to your

requirement. The pass/fail status of the selected tests will be updated
accordingly.

Note: The threshold values for the star rated files are set according to the EXFO
Advisor ratings thus cannot be edited.

Post-Processing Software 314

Working with OFM Files
Configuring thresholds

Note: For the EXFO Advisor rating status measurements, the stars indicate the
values that met the set threshold values.

For example, 5 stars indicates a good quality fiber and 1 star indicates a
poor quality fiber.

315 FastReporter 3
 Working with OFM Files
Configuring thresholds

Viewing the OFM test measurement values

You can view the fault xplorer, link mapper, splitter detection values and its
details of the selected OFM test measurements in the OFM table and the
viewer section.
Hover the mouse on the elements in the viewer section to know more
details about the microbends, splitters, connector, and other elements for
the individual tests.
To view the OFM test details:
Select the test measurement, and then select the OFM Table tab in the
Results section.

Note: The viewer section is not available for the files having the status as EXFO
Advisor (stars) and also for the multiple file selection.

Post-Processing Software 316

The PON standards are shown if available for the OFM measurements.
Also, you can see the PON elements and its values in the measurements
section.
 Working with OFM Files
Viewing Element Properties

Viewing Element Properties

You can view the element properties of the selected measurements. Select
the Measurements sub-menu. You can modify the parameter values from
the Results section too.

On the Element properties window that appears, change the element

properties as required, and then select OK. The properties will be set
accordingly for the selected test measurements.
You can also view the Element Properties for the selected test element
from the Results > Elements table. Select the Element 1, Element 2, and
so on, edit its respective properties. For example, you can change the Type
of element accordingly if available.

Note: The Element table information and details in the viewers section are not
available for the EXFO Advisor measurement files.

Post-Processing Software 318

Working with OFM Files
Using Custom Identifiers

Using Custom Identifiers

You can add up to five custom identifiers for your FIP files. The custom
identifiers are displayed in the Identification tab, in the Identifiers table. You
can find more information on how to manage custom identifiers in
Matching Files Based on Information on page 53.
To use a custom identifier:
1. Select the measurement for which you want to change the identifier.
2. From the Identifiers table of the Identification tab, use the drop-down
list to select the identifier type.
OR
Type to search and sort.

The Frame identifier type cannot be modified. Enter the information that
describes the groups of connectors included in the frames, as needed.

Note: The maximum character limit for the identifiers is 30.

319 FastReporter 3
8 Working with Fiber Inspection
Probe (FIP) files
Accepted File Formats
FastReporter 3 lets you work with measurement files saved in different
formats, but does not necessarily permit all operations on them.

File Format File Extension Display Modification

FIP (ConnectorMax) .cmax  a
FIP (ConnectorMax2) .cmax2  
FIP-500 .json  
.json.gz
.fip

a. Modified cmax files can only be saved as cmax2 format.

Theses file formats include:

 Inspection of single-fiber connectors
 Analysis of single-fiber connectors
 Inspection of multiple-fiber connectors

Post-Processing Software 320

Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
Modifying Unit Model and Serial Number

Modifying Unit Model and Serial Number

The application allows you to change the unit model as well as the unit
serial number for your FIP measurements on .cmax format files. You can
change the unit model and unit serial number of multiple measurements at
a time. The entered unit model and unit serial number are also displayed in
the FIP report.

Note: In .cmax2 format files, the unit model and serial number cannot be
modified.

To change the unit model:

1. Open the FIP measurements to change.
2. On the Results window, in the Identification tab, double-click on the
Unit model field and enter the required unit model number.

Note: You cannot enter special characters (?,/,<,>,",:,*, |,\).

Note: You can enter a maximum of twenty five characters.

321 FastReporter 3
 Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
Modifying Unit Model and Serial Number

To change the unit serial number:

1. Open the FIP measurements to change.
2. On the Results window, in the Identification tab, double-click on the
Unit serial number filed and enter the required unit serial number.

Note: You cannot enter special characters (?,/,<,>,",:,*, |,\).

Note: You can enter a maximum of twenty five characters.

Post-Processing Software 322

Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
Showing or Hiding Threshold and Result Information

Showing or Hiding Threshold and Result

Information
You can hide threshold and result information for zones that are not useful
for your analysis.

Note: You cannot modify the information. This is for viewing purposes only.

To show the overlay for the analysis and zones:

1. If you have not done so already, select the FIP tab.
2. Under View, select the corresponding option.

To select the zones to display:

1. If you have not done so already, select the FIP tab.
2. Under Show/Hide Zones, select which zones you want to see:

323 FastReporter 3
 Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
Applying a Configuration File to Selected FIP Files

Applying a Configuration File to Selected FIP

Files
You can select FIP files, and apply preset configuration data that you have
in a configuration file. You can use a configuration file you have on your
unit, or import it from another location.
To import a set configuration and apply it to your FIP files:
1. If you have not done so already, select the FIP tab.
2. Under Tools, select Apply Configuration.

3. Select which configuration you want to use in the list of available

choices. If you want to import a configuration file from another
location, use the Import button.

4. Click OK to confirm your choice.

Post-Processing Software 324

Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
FIP Graphic Display Options

FIP Graphic Display Options

The FastReporter 3 application displays the FIP overlay in the graph
window along with the FIP Image. An overlay highlights the inconsistencies
in your FIP with different colors described below.

Color Legend Analysis Anomaly Highlighting

Aqua PASS Scratch
Green PASS Defect
Red FAIL Anomaly

 FAIL Anomaly: the presence of this anomaly implies automatically a

FAIL result.
 PASS Scratch: the presence of this anomaly is not sufficient to confirm
a FAIL, the anomaly count in this case is relevant.
If you select more than one FIP files and enable the appropriate viewing
option, you can have the corresponding graphic displays appear all at once
on-screen. This feature is available for both single fibers and multiple
fibers.
You can also select to see the images according to the cable connector
view. The fibers included in a same cable are grouped, and the cable is
identified in the graph view.
You can copy the FIP images and/or overlays and paste them to the
clipboard. You can also change the display setting of the graph for FIP
measurements so that you can see both the overlay and the graph side by
side.

325 FastReporter 3
 Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
FIP Graphic Display Options

To change FIP graphic display options:

1. If you have not done so already, select the FIP tab.
2. Under View, select the cable or multifiber view according to the single
fiber test or multifiber test.:
 Cable View to display the corresponding mode.
 Multifiber View to display an image of all fibers for the selected
test.
Following are the examples for the FIP-400 and FIP-500 test
measurement files:

FIP-400
Single Fiber

The selection
of the A,B,C,D
options
relatively
show the
detailed Core,
Cladding,
Adhesive,
Contact, and
Status
information in
the FIP
Results table.

Post-Processing Software 326

Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
FIP Graphic Display Options

FIP-500
Single Fiber

The selection
of the A,B,C,D
options
relatively
show the
detailed Core,
Cladding,
Adhesive,
Contact, and
Status
information in
the FIP
Results table.

327 FastReporter 3
 Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
FIP Graphic Display Options

FIP-500
MultiFiber

The selection
of the A,B,C,D
options
relatively
show the
detailed Core,
Cladding,
and Status
information in
the FIP
Results table.

The order of the images is the same as the order of the files in the
Matched Files tab.

Post-Processing Software 328

Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
FIP Graphic Display Options

FIP-500
MultiFiber

The selection
of the A,B,C,D
options
relatively
show the
detailed Core,
Cladding,
and Status
information in
the FIP
Results table.

329 FastReporter 3
 Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
FIP Graphic Display Options

FIP-500
Duplex
Fiber

For duplex
mode, the view
of combined
overview image
is not available.
You can only
view the
multi-fiberview
.

Post-Processing Software 330

Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
FIP-500 Results table information

FIP-500 Results table information

The FIP-500 Results table shows the detailed information related to the
selected fiber. For FIP-500 tests, the threshold value is available in this table
instead of the separate Thresholds table as for the FIP-400 tests.
The Core, Cladding, and Status information is available in this table
according to the options selected for the multifiber tests. And additional
Adhesive and Contact information for single fiber tests.

331 FastReporter 3
 Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
FIP-500 Results table information

The following example shows that the Threshold value is zero, and the
defect count is 4 which meets the Criteria set and thus the result is fail.

Note: It will show the Ferrule and Status values too if available. Select/Unselect to
show/hide its value in table and its core in the individual fiber image.

You can view the tests with Surface Pass/Fail Criteria. The test is
determined to be passed or failed from the surface defects percentage.

Saving JSON and JSON.gz files to FIP extension:

You can now save the JSON and the JSON.gz files to the FIP (.fip) files.
To save json.gz file as FIP:
1. Open the required file.
2. Go to File > Save As, and then select the Selected File As option.

Post-Processing Software 332

Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
FIP-500 Results table information

3. Select the FIP Files (*.fip) extension form the Save as type..., and
then click Save.
The newly converted FIP file replaces the file in the Files section.

Note: You can also export the FIP file to JSON format. Refer the section Exporting
the measurements to JSON extension on page 527 to know the procedure
to do it..

333 FastReporter 3
 Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
Using Custom Identifiers

Using Custom Identifiers

You can add up to five custom identifiers for your FIP files. The custom
identifiers are displayed in the Identification tab, in the Identifiers table.
You can find more information on how to manage custom identifiers in
Matching Files Based on Information on page 55.
To use a custom identifier:
1. Select the measurement for which you want to change the identifier.
2. From the Identifiers table of the Identification tab, use the drop-down
list to select the identifier type.
OR
Type the new type directly on-screen.

The Frame identifier type cannot be modified. Enter the information

that describes the groups of connectors included in the frames, as
needed.

Note: The maximum character limit for these identifiers is 30.

Post-Processing Software 334

Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
Saving Legacy FIP Files in .cmax2 File Format

Saving Legacy FIP Files in .cmax2 File Format

You can import and view legacy image files (.jpg, .jpeg and .bmp formats)
using FastReporter 3. Once the image file is open, it is displayed in the
graphic window. and is converted and saved in .cmax2 format.

Note: When opening .cmax legacy files (ConnectorMax format), they will also be
automatically converted to the .cmax 2 format and can only be saved as
such if you modify them.

To import an image file:

1. If you have not done so already, select the FIP tab.
2. Under Import, select the corresponding button.

3. Select the required image and click Open.

Note: Under the Identification tab, the application displays the file name, test
date, and the test time of the image. The rest of the fields remains empty
but is editable.

Viewing Power Meter and OLTS Results

Your .cmax2 file could contain both FIP and power meter data, or FIP and
loss data in a single file. Power meter and OLTS results are displayed in
their respective tables. For more details, see Viewing Power Meter Results
on page 377 and Working with OLTS Files on page 338.

335 FastReporter 3
 Working with Fiber Inspection Probe (FIP) files
Viewing Geolocation Information

Viewing Geolocation Information

Your fiber inspection probe files can include GPS coordinate data that
pinpoints where the test was performed. This information is displayed in
the Identification tab when you open your file.

The information is the latitude, a separator character, and the longitude. If

you have more than one locations, they will be separated by a semi-colon.

Note: If you are using FastReporter 3 on a computer and have selected a single
file, the geolocation information becomes a hyperlink that will take you to
the corresponding location on Google Maps, using the default Web
browser.

Post-Processing Software 336

9 Working with OLTS Files
Accepted File Formats
FastReporter 3 lets you work with measurement files saved in different
formats, but does not necessarily permit all operations on them.

File Format File Extension Display Modification

FOT-920, FOT-930, .olts  
FTB-3930
.olts2  
.dat  
.oltsx  
MAX-900 .olts  
ConnectorMax 2 .cmax2  

Note: The .oltsx format includes both single- and multi-wavelength

measurements.

Note: The 64-bit version of FastReporter 3 may not support all file formats. To
view .olts files that come from FOT-930s or FTB-3930 modules, save them
first in a newer .olts format using the 32-bit version of the application.

Post-Processing Software 338

Working with OLTS Files
Changing OLTS Settings

Changing OLTS Settings

Depending on the type of files you are working with (whether they come
from FTB-3930 and FOT-930 units, or the MAX-900 series), some settings
can be modified.
You can change the identification settings for your FTB-3930 and FOT-930
files, as well as the pass/fail threshold values, which can come from
different sources:
 From the measurement file
 From the application
In the case of files coming from the MAX-900 series, you can select the unit
to display the reference value.
To change OLTS threshold settings:
1. From the ribbon, select the OLTS tab if it is not selected already.
2. Select Settings.

3. Select the Pass/Fail Thresholds tab.

339 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Changing OLTS Settings

4. Select the type of threshold to use for your analysis.

Post-Processing Software 340

Working with OLTS Files
Changing OLTS Settings

5. Set the wavelength list as needed if you are using the thresholds from
the application:
 To add a wavelength, click the button, enter the wavelength
value, and click OK.
 To remove one or more wavelengths, select the values in the
Wavelength list and click the button.
Each wavelength can have different thresholds. If you have selected
the custom thresholds, you can modify the values. The Apply option
must be enabled for the values to be active and modifiable.
If you select more than one wavelength in the list, any modification to
the thresholds will apply to all of the selected wavelengths. You can
select All if you want to add custom thresholds for all available
wavelengths.

6. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
apply the changes and close the dialog box, click OK.

341 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Changing OLTS Settings

You can view the results in the OLTS Table tab in the main window.

Note: In the case of multi-wavelength files, the reference unit may show dB
and/or dBm depending on the measurement.

To select the display unit for the reference value on MAX-900

files:
1. From the ribbon, select the OLTS tab if it is not selected already.
2. Select Settings.

3. Select the General tab.

Post-Processing Software 342

Working with OLTS Files
Changing OLTS Settings

4. Select the desired unit.

The reference unit will be displayed in the FasTesT Table tab between
parentheses.
5. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
apply the changes and close the dialog box, click OK.

343 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Applying a Configuration File to Selected OLTS Files

Applying a Configuration File to Selected OLTS

Files
You can select OLTS files and apply preset configuration data that you have
in a configuration file. You can use a configuration file you have on your
unit, or import it from another location.

Note: This feature is available for MAX-900 files only.

To import a set configuration and apply it to your files:

1. From the ribbon, select the OLTS tab if it is not selected already.
2. Under Tools, select Apply Configuration.

3. Select which configuration you want to use in the list of available

choices. If you want to import a configuration file from another
location, use the Import button.

4. Click OK to confirm your choice.

Post-Processing Software 344

Working with OLTS Files
Using Custom Identifiers

Using Custom Identifiers

You can add up to five custom identifiers for your OLTS files. The custom
identifiers are displayed in the Identification tab, in the Identifiers table.
You can find more information on how to manage custom identifiers in
Matching Files Based on Information on page 55.
To use a custom identifier:
1. Select the measurement for which you want to change the identifier.
2. From the Identifiers table of the Identification tab, use the drop-down
list to select the identifier type.
OR
Type the new type directly on-screen.

345 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Changing the OLTS Fiber Type

Changing the OLTS Fiber Type

When working with OLTS files, you can select a specific fiber type.
Different fiber types are available depending on the type of mode you are
working with (singlemode or multimode).
To change the fiber type:
1. Open the file or files you want to modify.

Note: You can only change the fiber type of multiple files if they are of the same
mode.

2. In the Summary tab, under Link Definition, use the corresponding

drop-down list to select the desired fiber type.

Post-Processing Software 346

Working with OLTS Files
Changing the Number of Connections in the Link Definition

Changing the Number of Connections in the

Link Definition
You can modify the number of connections in the link to see the impact of
adding or removing connections on the dynamic loss budget thresholds.
The threshold status and link view will be modified accordingly.
To change the number of connections:
1. Open the file or files you want to modify.
2. In the Summary tab, under Link Definition, click into the
corresponding box to enter the desired value.

Note: When you change the link definition parameters, the pass/fail thresholds
will be recalculated.

347 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Changing the Number of Splices in the Link Definition

Changing the Number of Splices in the Link

Definition
You can modify the number of splices in the link to see the impact of
adding or removing splices on the dynamic loss budget thresholds. The
threshold status and link view will be modified accordingly.
To change the number of splices:
1. Open the file or files you want to modify.
2. In the Summary tab, under Link Definition, double-click into the
corresponding box to enter the desired value.

Post-Processing Software 348

Working with OLTS Files
Changing the Loss Calculation Method for Bidirectional Files

Changing the Loss Calculation Method for

Bidirectional Files
If you select at least one direction of a bidirectional file, the application will
show you the calculation method used to calculate loss:
 Average
 Worst value
 Average; Worst (when at least one value in the selected files is of each
type)
You can change this value for the selected files.
To change the loss calculation method:
1. Open the file or files you want to modify.
2. In the Summary tab, under Test Settings, click into the Bidirectional
Loss box to select the desired value.

The changes will be automatically reflected in the FasTesT tab and the
cable view.

349 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Setting Unidirectional Pass/Fail

Setting Unidirectional Pass/Fail

You can set the Unidirectional Pass/Fail value to Yes/No to show the
verdict indicators (fonts) of the Average Loss, Loss A>B and Loss B>A
information in the FasTesT table.
Setting of the Unidirectional Pass/Fail value depends on the Bidirectional
loss value.
If the Bidirectional loss value is set to Worst, the default value for the
Unidirectional Pass/Fail is always Yes.
If the Bidirectional loss value is set to Average, the Unidirectional
Pass/Fail value can be set to Yes/No.
The following examples explain the scenarios for the Unidirectional
Pass/Fail values set:
Example 1:
1. Expand the required test file from Files section, and then select the
individual measurement.
2. Set the Bidirectional loss to Worst, the Unidirectional Pass/Fail will
automatically set to the default value Yes and is not changeable.
3. Go to the FastTesT table to view the verdicts.
The verdicts of the Average Loss, Loss A>B and Loss B>A values are
displayed accordingly. The green font indicates pass and highlighted
red indicates fail.

Post-Processing Software 350

Working with OLTS Files
Setting Unidirectional Pass/Fail

Example 2:
1. Expand the required test file from Files section, and then select the
individual measurement.
2. Set the Bidirectional loss to Average.
3. Set the Unidirectional Pass/Fail value to Yes.
4. Go to the FastTesT table to view the verdicts.
The verdicts of the Average Loss, Loss A>B and Loss B>A values are
displayed accordingly. The green font indicates pass and highlighted
red indicates fail.

351 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Setting Unidirectional Pass/Fail

Example 3:
1. Expand the required test file from Files section, and then select the
individual measurement.
2. Set the Bidirectional loss to Average.
3. Select the Unidirectional Pass/Fail value to No.
4. The verdicts in the FastTesT table are not shown for Loss A>B and
Loss B>A values. However, the verdicts for Average Loss values are
shown accordingly. The green font indicates pass and highlighted red
indicates fail.

Post-Processing Software 352

Working with OLTS Files
Setting Unidirectional Pass/Fail

353 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Setting FasTesT Pass/Fail Thresholds

Setting FasTesT Pass/Fail Thresholds

Depending on the type of threshold you have selected for your files, you
can adjust some of the values on the current measurements to better fit
your needs.

Note: You can use one or several of the types at a same time.

Note: If you set a maximum ORL threshold value, it will apply to all wavelengths.

 Fixed link thresholds: this setting will use the link pass/fail threshold
value, the maximum link length and link loss value as the thresholds.
 Dynamic loss budget: this setting will use the link pass/fail threshold
value, and the fiber attenuation, as well as the splice loss and
connector loss values as the thresholds. The first and last connectors
will also be used in the calculation.
 Certification standards: this setting allows you to determine which
certification standards will be taken into account for the cabling or the
application.

Post-Processing Software 354

Working with OLTS Files
Setting FasTesT Pass/Fail Thresholds

To apply specific certification standards:

1. Select the file or files for which you want to change the threshold type.
2. Select the Thresholds tab, then click Select Standards.

3. Navigate in the application and cabling standard lists to select the

items you need. Use the + button to show the detailed available
choices.

355 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Setting FasTesT Pass/Fail Thresholds

4. If you want to see the threshold details for a specific standard, select it,
then click View Threshold Details at the bottom of the window.

Post-Processing Software 356

Working with OLTS Files
Setting FasTesT Pass/Fail Thresholds

The maximum and minimum link loss, as well as the maximum

attenuation values will depend on the wavelength you select on the
left. The fiber type selected will also display different values. Click OK
when you are done to return to the list of standards.

5. Once you are done, click OK to confirm the addition of the standards.
The tab is updated accordingly.

357 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Setting FasTesT Pass/Fail Thresholds

To select and modify the custom thresholds:

1. Select the file or files for which you want to change the threshold type.
2. Select the Thresholds tab, then the custom thresholds option.

3. Select whether you want to set fixed link loss thresholds, or a dynamic
loss budget, then modify the values as needed.

Note: If the unit used to take the measurements was not a Fiber Certifier (iCERT
model), you cannot select the dynamic loss budget option or any of the
certification standards and the maximum dynamic loss value is not
displayed in the tab.

Post-Processing Software 358

Working with OLTS Files
Viewing FasTesT Results

Viewing FasTesT Results

When you display FasTesT result files, you can see the details in the
FasTesT Table. Click on the loss value of any result (in the table, link view
or Measurement tab) to see detailed information about the margin, test
configuration used, wavelength, limit and result.

When working with bidirectional files, the loss will be indicated as the
average or worst value, depending on what setting is selected.

Note: The Identification, Summary, Thresholds, and FasTesT tables tabappears in

the results table if the measurements have the duplex, FasTesT, etc.values
are available.

Note: For a quick general overview of the pass/fail statuses of your

measurements according to the certification standards, you can select the
Certification view in the Measurement tab.

359 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Viewing Link View Results

Viewing Link View Results

You can view the results for MAX-900 series OLTS files in the graph
view.

Click on any result to

see detailed
information about
the margin, test
configuration used,
wavelength, limit
and result.

Post-Processing Software 360

Working with OLTS Files
Viewing Link View Results

In the case of bidirectional measurements, if you select both

measurements from the same file, the link view displays both connections
between the main and remote units

361 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Viewing Pass/Fail Status Information

Viewing Pass/Fail Status Information

When working with MAX-900 series files, you can see the detailed pass/fail
information for all standards used during the FasTesT.
To view the global pass/fail information:
1. From the Files or Measurements tabs, select the file or files for which
you want to see the status.
2. Right-click the selected files, then select Global Pass/Fail Status.

Post-Processing Software 362

Working with OLTS Files
Viewing Pass/Fail Status Information

3. The information appears in a tooltip window. Click anywhere to exit.

363 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Understanding Diagnostics

Understanding Diagnostics
OLTS result files made with the MAX-900 series provide you with
diagnostics to help you with detected problems or ambiguous
measurement situations. You can see the diagnostics in the Measurements
tab, the FasTesT Table tab, and in the link view.
To display the diagnostics in the Measurement tab:
1. Right-click in the column headers to make the Diagnostics column
appear.
2. Click on the icon of the diagnostic that you want to view.

To view diagnostics in the FasTesT Table tab and Link View:

Click on the corresponding icon.

Post-Processing Software 364

Working with OLTS Files
Merging OLTS Measurement Files

Merging OLTS Measurement Files

You might want to merge several measurement files to create a single file.
This can be useful for example if you have downloaded several
single-measurement files from the TestFlow server.
To merge measurement files into one:
1. Open the files that you want to merge and select them in the list.
2. From the ribbon, select the OLTS tab if it is not selected already.
3. Select the Merge Measurements button.

4. Change the name and location as needed, then click Save.

You can also access the merge feature in right-click menu of the
Measurements tab.

365 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Creating 24 fiber test measurement

Creating 24 fiber test measurement

You can merge a set of two 12 fibers test measurements as if tested as a 24
fiber test and analyze the behavior of it as a single test. For example, if you
have tested a 24 fiber cable with 12 fiber type connector, the first 12 fibers
in one time and remaining 12 fibers afterwards, these two test
measurement files can be merged together using this feature and save it as
a single 24 fiber test measurement file.

IMPORTANT
The two test measurement files selected should have the same
Wavelength, Thresholds, Fiber Type, Number of Connections, Number of
Splices, and Fiber Layout.

How to create a 24 fiber test measurement

You can select two loss or a power test measurements to use this feature.
To create a 24 fiber test measurement:
1. Select two separate 12 fiber test measurements (two loss files).

Post-Processing Software 366

Working with OLTS Files
Creating 24 fiber test measurement

2. Select the 24 fiber mode option if not already selected.

The two 12 fiber test measurements will now show the details as a
single 24 fiber test measurement.

Note: Expand the + icon to see the detailed information of this 24 fiber test
measurement for each wavelength.

367 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Creating 24 fiber test measurement

Saving the created 24 fiber test measurement

You can save the created 24 fiber test measurement as a single file and
analyze it accordingly.
To save the created 24 fiber test files
1. Select 12 fiber two different test files, select the 24 fiber mode, and
then select the Bi-directional Icon.

Note: You can also right click on the required files, and then select Create 24 Fib
Files...

2. Select the location and other options, and then select OK to save the
file. The saved file can now be opened as a single 24 fiber file.

Post-Processing Software 368

Working with OLTS Files
Creating 24 fiber test measurement

369 FastReporter 3
 Working with OLTS Files
Creating a Virtual Bi-directional test measurement

Creating a Virtual Bi-directional test

measurement
Two single files can be merged together to analyze the virtual bi-directional
file for analyses. This file cannot be saved as a single Bi-directional file.

How to create a virtual bi-directional test

measurement
Two set of files, for example, test executed from A>B direction and another
file tested from B>A location can be merged to analyze the parameters as
if the test executed is bi-directional and not as a two separate tests
executed at two different ends.
To create a virtual bi-directional test measurement:
1. Select the required two individual test measurement files tested at two
different ends.

Post-Processing Software 370

Working with OLTS Files
Creating a Virtual Bi-directional test measurement

2. Select the Virtual Bi-dir mode option if not already selected.

The Loss MF Table tab in the Results section will change to Loss MF
BDR Table. In addition to other values, the Average Loss values and
reference direction specific values will be updated in the Loss MF BDR
Table.

IMPORTANT
The two test measurement files selected should be from different
directions (A>B and another from B>A).
Also should have the same Wavelength, Actual Polarity, Thresholds, Fiber
Type, Number of Connections, Number of Splices, and Fiber Layout.

371 FastReporter 3
10 Working with OPM/PPM
Measurements
Accepted File Formats
FastReporter 3 lets you work with measurement files saved in the following
formats, but does not necessarily permit all operations on them.
Select the appropriate options and elements available for the 24 fiber test
measurements files.
File Format File Extension Display Modification
PPM-350D .ppm  
PPM-350C .ppm  
PPM1 .opm  
iOLM .iolm  
OPM .oltsx  
ConnectorMax 2 .cmax2  
MAX-900 Series .olts  
OPM Power .opm  
OPM Loss .opm  
OPM Power Multifiber (MF) .opm  
OPM Loss Multifiber (MF) .opm  

Post-Processing Software 372

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Accepted File Formats

Selecting the Absolute Power Unit

You can set FastReporter 3 to use either dBm, watts, or use the power unit
used in the measurement you are viewing.
To select the power unit:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OPM ribbon tab.
2. Select Settings.

3. In the General tab, select which unit to use.

4. Click OK to confirm your choice and close the window.

373 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Changing OPM/PPM Settings

Changing OPM/PPM Settings

The pass/fail thresholds that you set for PON Power Meter (PPM) or Optical
Power Meter (OPM) projects and the predefined thresholds are applied on
the corresponding table tabs in the Results window. If you need to change
the threshold for analysis purposes, it can be done in the Thresholds tab.
To select which thresholds to use for the measurements:
1. If you have not done so already, select the OPM ribbon tab.
2. Select Settings.

3. In the Pass/Fail Thresholds tab, select whether the thresholds to use

are those from the measurement file, or those from the application.

Note: In the case of FTTx measurements, you can only use the thresholds from
the measurement files.

4. Click OK to confirm your choice and close the window.

Post-Processing Software 374

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Changing OPM/PPM Settings

To change OPM/PPM settings:

1. Open the file which contains OPM/PPM measurements.
2. On the Results window, click the Thresholds tab.

Thresholds PPM

Thresholds OPM
(PX1) Power

Thresholds OPM
(PX1) Loss

375 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Changing OPM/PPM Settings

3. Select a wavelength or wavelengths to modify. Select All to select all

wavelengths.
4. In the table, select the respective checkbox in the Apply column and
modify the minimum and maximum threshold values according to
your requirement. The values cannot be less or more than the standard
values for the selected wavelengths. Clearing the checkbox will not
apply its associated value. Select Default Settings to set the default
values.

Post-Processing Software 376

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Viewing Power Meter Results

Viewing Power Meter Results

Power meter results are displayed in the OPM and PPM tables.
To view the Power meter results for OPM measurements:
1. Select OPM measurements.
2. From the Results window, select OPM Table/Loss Table.

To view the Power meter results for PPM measurements:

1. Select the file which contains PPM measurements.
2. From the Results window, select PPM Table.

377 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Viewing Power Meter Results

To view the Power meter results for the OPM (PX1)

measurements:
1. Select the file which contains the PX1 power and Loss measurements.
From the Results window, select OPM Table or Loss Table according to
the selected files.

OPM (PX1)
Power with
PON
Technology

OPM (PX1)
Power with
Modulation

Note: The reference values, application name, and ITU channel and Modulation
information appears if available for the selected measurements.

Post-Processing Software 378

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Viewing Power Meter Results

OPM
(PX1)
Loss
Results
with ITU
Channel

PPM
(PPM1)
Power
Results with
PON
Technology

Note: The reference values, application name, and ITU channel information
appears if available for the selected measurements.

To view the Power meter results for the PPM (PPM1)

measurements:
1. Select the file which contains the PPM1 power and Loss
measurements. From the Results window, select Loss Table or Power
table according to the selected files.

379 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Viewing Power Meter Results

PPM
(PPM1)
Loss
Results with
PON
Technology

PPM
(PPM1)
Loss
Results with
PON
Technology

Post-Processing Software 380

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Setting Thresholds for the OPM MF tests

Setting Thresholds for the OPM MF tests

Depending on the type of threshold you have selected for your files, you
can adjust some of the values on the current measurements according to
your needs.

Note: You can use one or several of the Threshold options for all the selected
tests. The values appear in the respective fields in a comma separated
form.

Note: Select individual Test or all selected tests, it will apply to all wavelengths
available for the test.

 Thresholds for all wavelength: This setting will use the test pass/fail
threshold value, the maximum and minimum power and loss value for
the test can be set to access or modify the selected test files.
 Fibers evaluated: This setting will set the test’s pass/fail status with
respect to the number of fibers selected. E.g. single row 1 x 8
 Expected Polarity: The polarity threshold is set to access the pass/fail of
OPM MF Loss tests accordingly.
To set the threshold type option and its values:
1. Select the required file to set or modify its threshold values.
Modify the wavelengths, threshold parameters, Connections, splices
and so on accordingly and save the file. The pass/fail status will be
changed according to the newly set threshold configurations.

Note: The threshold option and its values will be displayed according to the
threshold set for the selected file. For example, if the selected file does not
have any threshold values set, it will display None option. If the file has
fixed threshold values, it will display the Custom (Fixed) threshold option
and its values. Similarly, if the file has dynamic threshold values, it will
display the Custom (Dynamic) option, Cabling standards, and the Network
application standards..

381 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Setting Thresholds for the OPM MF tests

IMPORTANT
The modified values for the selected threshold option will be lost and
will not be remembered if you select another threshold option in
between before saving the file.
The last selected threshold option and its values will be considered and
set for the selected file. So do not select any other threshold options after
configuring the required values unless you specifically want to set
another threshold option and its values for the file.

Post-Processing Software 382

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Setting Thresholds for the OPM MF tests

For the Cabling and Network standards select the required Certificate
Standards from the list that are available to select according to the fiber
type you have selected.

383 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Setting Thresholds for the OPM MF tests

To apply maximum and minimum Threshold values for both

Power tests:
1. Select the file or files for which you want to change the threshold type.
2. Select the Thresholds tab, and then set the Maximum and Minimum
Power or Loss values.

Note: You can select the Default Settings to set the default threshold values for
the selected tests.

Post-Processing Software 384

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Setting Thresholds for the OPM MF tests

To select or modify the Fiber Evaluated thresholds:

1. Select the file or files for which you want to change the threshold type.
2. Select the Thresholds tab, then select the Fibers layout option.

3. On the Fibers layout window, select the number of fibers according to

your requirement for assessment and click Apply.
The result of the tests are updated according to the fiber evaluated set
value.

385 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Setting Thresholds for the OPM MF tests

To select or modify the Polarity thresholds for Loss tests:

1. Select the file or files for which you want to change the threshold type.
2. Select the Thresholds tab, and then select the polarity from the
Expected polarity drop down list..
The global pass/fail status of the test updates according to the type of
polarity set for the selected tests.

3.

Note: If this is set to Unspecified, the global pass/fail status will be Unknown.

Post-Processing Software 386

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Viewing OPM MF Results

Viewing OPM MF Results

You can view all the details of the selected Power and Loss tests. The
global pass/fail can be accessed by modifying and setting the new
threshold values.

Note: To see the result of each individual fiber from the performed test. Click the
+ icon to expand the selected test. Click the - icon on the expanded window
again to collapse.

To view the test results for the OPM (MF) measurements:

1. Select the file which contains the MF power or Loss measurements.
2. From the Results window, select Power MF Table or Loss MF Table
according to the files selected.

OPM (MF)
Power
Results

387 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Viewing OPM MF Results

OPM (MF)
Loss
Results
with
Polarity
Type

Note: The type of polarity will appear if available in the test.

Post-Processing Software 388

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Configuring Link Definitions

Configuring Link Definitions

You can define or modify the Fiber Type, number of connections, and
number of splices for the selected test(s).
To modify the link definitions:
1. Open and select the required OPM-MF test measurement file.
2. On the Results table, go to the Summary tab and then set or modify
the Number of connections or Number of splices in the Link
Definitions table.

Note: The number of connections and number range should be in between 2 to

99. And, the splices values should be in between 0 to 99.

389 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Changing the Correction Factor (Plus Mode)

Changing the Correction Factor (Plus Mode)

Correction factors are used to adjust the OPM and PPM measurements.
The correction factor is specified by wavelength only, and the fiber core
size is not taken into account. FastReporter 3 allows you to change the
correction factor for PPM file types. These corrections should be made
before the measurement is taken and should be stored with each
measurement. A correction factor of 1.0 has no effect on the
measurement.

Note: The correction factor is not available for measurements from iOLM files.

To change the correction factor:

1. Open an OPM or a PPM measurement file.
2. Select the measurements for which you want to change the correction
factor.
3. In the Results window, select the Summary tab.

4. Modify the correction factors associated with the wavelengths as

needed. Click the desired correction factor value under Test Settings
column and modify it.

Post-Processing Software 390

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Creating Configuration Files for the PPM-350D

Creating Configuration Files for the PPM-350D

You can create your configuration files for the PPM-350D units in
FastReporter 3, then transfer them to your unit for uniform testing.

Note: For information about using the configuration files on the units, refer to the
user guide for the PPM-350D.

To create a configuration file:

1. If you have not done so already, select the OPM tab.
2. Under PPM-350D Configuration, select Create.

3. Select the Properties tab.

4. Enter a name and a description for your configuration. The
configuration name will also be used when saving the file.

391 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Creating Configuration Files for the PPM-350D

5. Select the location for your tests (ONT or OLT), as well as the direction
(upstream, downstream, both, or undefined).

6. Select the measurement type for your test (power, loss, both, or
unspecified).

7. Select the Link Definition tab.

Post-Processing Software 392

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Creating Configuration Files for the PPM-350D

8. Enter the information for the layers in your configuration. You can have
up to three layers depending on the standard you choose.
8a. Select the standard to use for your test. The list of available
standards will vary according to the information you have
selected in the Properties tab.

393 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Creating Configuration Files for the PPM-350D

8b. Enter the details related to the tests.

The standards section lets you use the drop-down lists to enter the
information.
The user-defined section lets you select the upstream and
downstream wavelengths, plus add thresholds if you have
entered power or loss as the measurement type.

9. If needed, repeat step 8 for the two other layer tabs.

10. Once you are done, click Save to store the configuration file.
11. Select the location for your file, then click Save to confirm your choice.

Post-Processing Software 394

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Creating Configuration Files for the PPM-350D

To view or edit a configuration file:

1. If you have not done so already, select the OPM tab.
2. Under PPM-350D Configuration, select View/Edit.

3. Select which configuration file you want to edit, then click Open.
4. Change the test configuration as needed. You can change anything
except for the name of the configuration. Once you are done, click
Save.

395 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Creating 24 fiber test measurement

Creating 24 fiber test measurement

You can merge a set of two 12 fibers test measurements as if tested as a 24
fiber test and analyze the behavior of it as a single test. For example, if you
have tested a 24 fiber cable with 12 fiber type connector, the first 12 fibers
in one time and remaining 12 fibers afterwards, these two test
measurement files can be merged together using this feature and save it as
a single 24 fiber test measurement file.

IMPORTANT
The two test measurement files selected should have the same
Wavelength, Thresholds, and Fiber Layout.

How to create a 24 fiber test measurement

You can select two loss or a power test measurements to use this feature.
To create a 24 fiber test measurement:
1. Select two separate 12 fiber test measurements (two power files).

Post-Processing Software 396

Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Creating 24 fiber test measurement

2. Select the 24 fiber mode option if not already selected.

The two 12 fiber test measurements will now show the details as a
single 24 fiber test measurement.

Note: Expand the + icon to see the detailed information of this 24 fiber test
measurement.

Saving the created 24 fiber test measurement

You can save the created 24 fiber test measurement as a single file and
analyze it accordingly.
To save the created 24 fiber test measurement:

Step 1

397 FastReporter 3
 Working with OPM/PPM Measurements
Creating 24 fiber test measurement

Step 2

Select the saving location and other options, and then select OK to save the
file. The saved file can now be opened as a single 24 fiber file.

Post-Processing Software 398

11 Working with CD Files
Accepted File Formats
FastReporter 3 lets you work with measurement files saved in different
formats, but does not necessarily permit all operations on them.

File Format File Extension Display Modification

EXFO CD .exfocd  
(FTB-5800 modules)
CDPMD .cdpmd  
(FTB-5700 modules)

Note: The .cdpmd file may also contain fiber length and PMD information.

Note: When you modify information or data that is common to both CD and PMD
formats in .cdpmd files, the contents is automatically updated in both
measurement types.

Post-Processing Software 400

Working with CD Files
Changing CD Settings

Changing CD Settings
The pass/fail thresholds that you set for CD projects are displayed on the
Summary tab in the Results window. Should you need to change the
wavelength measurement range for analysis purposes, this is also done in
the Summary tab.
The dispersion thresholds are applied on the maximum dispersion for the
measurement file and on each dispersion value of the CD table.
To change CD settings:
1. On the ribbon, select the CD tab if it is not selected already.
2. Select the Settings menu.
3. If you have not done so already, select the CD ribbon tab.
4. Select Settings.

401 FastReporter 3
 Working with CD Files
Changing CD Settings

5. Select the type of threshold to use for your analysis, either from the
measurement file itself or from a list of predetermined thresholds.
 The threshold from the measurement file is the one that was used
during the actual CD test. When you select this threshold, you
cannot modify the values in the threshold table.
 The threshold from the application is a threshold set by
FastReporter 3, which you can select and modify.

6. Modify the displayed values as needed. The Apply option must be

enabled for the values to be active and modifiable.
7. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
apply the changes and close the dialog box, click OK.

Post-Processing Software 402

Working with CD Files
Changing CD Settings

The thresholds are displayed in the main window, in the Summary tab,
under Results. If some values failed the test, they will appear clearly in red.

Note: The first figure illustrates the display for a .cdpmd file, and the second for an
.exfocd file.

403 FastReporter 3
 Working with CD Files
Changing CD Settings

You can view the details for your measurement file in the CD Table tab.
Depending on the type of CD measurement file you are viewing (.exfocd or
.cdpmd), the available information differs. Any failed measurement will
also show in this tab.

Note: RGD measurements are only available in .exfocd files.

Note: If you do not see the CD Table tab, make sure you have selected only one
measurement in the list.

.cdpmd file

.exfocd file

Post-Processing Software 404

Working with CD Files
Changing CD Settings

It is possible for you to change the table wavelength, that is the way to
calculate the table according to the Results from and Results to values. You
can select from the table wavelength values below.
 1 nm (Results range with a step of 1 nm in-between values)
 50 GHz
 100 GHz
 200 GHz
 From the acquisition
To change the table wavelength:
1. From the ribbon, select the CD tab if it is not selected already.
2. In the Table Wavelength list, select the value you want to use.

If a file is open already, the values are automatically updated.

405 FastReporter 3
 Working with CD Files
Changing CD Fiber Type

Changing CD Fiber Type

FastReporter 3 allows you to analyze various fiber types for chromatic
dispersion.
To change the CD fiber type:
1. Open a CD measurement file.
2. Select the measurement or measurements for which you want to
change the fiber type.
3. In the main window, select the Summary tab.

Post-Processing Software 406

Working with CD Files
Changing CD Fiber Type

4. Select the fiber type according to your needs in the Fiber Type box:
 G.652 NDSF (3-term Sellmeier fit)
 G.653 DSF (quadratic fit)
 G.655 NZDSF (quadratic fit)
 G.656 Wideband NZDSF (quadratic fit)
 Compensating (quadratic fit)
 Flattened (cubic fit)
 Amplified Links (cubic fit)
 Custom (default cubic fit)

Note: When you select a different fiber type, the fit is automatically changed to
match the default fit value for this new fiber type. However, you can change
this new fit type as desired in the corresponding list.

407 FastReporter 3
 Working with CD Files
Changing Analysis Range

Changing Analysis Range

The range used for taking the measurement and the range used for
analyzing the results can be different if you want to concentrate your
analysis on a specific area. You can change it for both types of CD files.
To change the analysis range (results from and results to values):
1. Open a CD measurement file.
2. Select the measurement or measurements for which you want to
change the analysis range.
3. In the main window, select the Summary tab.
4. In the Results from and Results to boxes, change the wavelength
range values as needed for your analysis.

Post-Processing Software 408

Working with CD Files
Changing the Fiber Length

Changing the Fiber Length

If you are working with an .exfocd format file, you can change the fiber
length to obtain more precision in your analysis.
To change the fiber length:
1. Open a CD measurement file.
2. Select the measurement or measurements for which you want to
change the fiber length.
3. In the main window, select the Summary tab.
4. In the Fiber Length box, enter a new value for the analysis.

Note: If your file is in .cdpmd format, the fiber length was measured
automatically during the measurement and cannot be edited.

409 FastReporter 3
 Working with CD Files
Switching Between Curve Types

Switching Between Curve Types

If you have a specified fiber length in your CD file, you can view either the
chromatic dispersion or the chromatic dispersion coefficient curves.
To switch between the coefficient and dispersion curves:
1. From the ribbon, select the CD tab if it is not selected already.
2. Under View, select the Coefficient option.

The table values in the Summary tab are updated automatically.

Post-Processing Software 410

Working with CD Files
Showing the Zero-Dispersion Wavelength

Showing the Zero-Dispersion Wavelength

The zero-dispersion wavelength (where dispersion is at zero) corresponds
to the wavelength point at which the fiber under test reaches its maximum
bandwidth. The slope from this zero-dispersion point indicates how fast
dispersion rises as wavelength increases. Key chromatic dispersion
parameters are the dispersion zero and the slope at zero dispersion.
You can display the zero-dispersion wavelength on your files. It will appear
in a table under the Summary tab.
To display the zero-dispersion wavelength table:
1. From the ribbon, select the CD tab if it is not selected already.
2. Select the Show Lambda Zero option.

411 FastReporter 3
12 Working with PMD Files
Accepted File Formats
FastReporter 3 lets you work with measurement files saved in different
formats, but does not necessarily permit all operations on them.

File Format File Extension Display Modification

PMD .pmd  
(FTB-5500 modules)
PMDB .pmdb  
(FTB-5500 modules)
CDPMD .cdpmd  
(FTB-5700 modules)

Note: The 64-bit version of FastReporter 3 does not support the .pmd and .pmdb
file formats. Install the 32-bit version to view and process those files.

Note: The .cdpmd file may also contain fiber length and CD information.

Note: When you modify information or data that is common to both CD and PMD
formats in .cdpmd files, the contents is automatically updated in both
measurement types.

Post-Processing Software 412

Working with PMD Files
Changing PMD Settings

Changing PMD Settings

You can change the thresholds you want to use for the analysis:
 The threshold from the measurement file is the one that was used
during the actual PMD test. When you select this threshold, you cannot
modify the values in the threshold table.
 The threshold from the application is a threshold set by FastReporter 3,
which you can select and modify.
To change PMD settings:
1. On the ribbon, select the PMD tab if it is not selected already.
2. Select the Settings menu.

3. Select the type of threshold to use for your analysis.

413 FastReporter 3
 Working with PMD Files
Changing PMD Settings

4. Modify the displayed values as needed if you selected to use a

threshold from the application. The Apply option must be enabled for
the values to be active and modifiable.

5. To apply the changes without closing the dialog box, click Apply. To
apply the changes and close the dialog box, click OK.

Post-Processing Software 414

Working with PMD Files
Changing PMD Settings

The thresholds are displayed in the main window, in the Summary tab,
under Results.

Note: If some values failed the test, they will appear clearly in red.

Note: The .cdpmd files do not display a graph for the PMD measurement.

415 FastReporter 3
 Working with PMD Files
Changing Fiber Length

Changing Fiber Length

If you are working with .pmd or .pmdb files, you can change the fiber
length to obtain more precision in your analysis.
To change the fiber length:
1. Open a PMD measurement file.
2. Select the measurement or measurements for which you want to
change the fiber length.
3. In the main window, select the Summary tab.

4. Locate the fiber length value under Test Settings and modify it as
needed.

Note: If your file is in .cdpmd format, the fiber length was measured
automatically during the measurement and cannot be edited.

Post-Processing Software 416

Working with PMD Files
Working with PMD Statistic Measurements

Working with PMD Statistic Measurements

When selecting more than one PMD measurements on a same file, the
Statistics tab appears. This tab can be used to see average values for the
measurements.
To exclude a measurement from the statistic values:
1. Open a PMD measurement file.
2. Select the measurement or measurements that you want to exclude
from the statistics values.
3. In the main window, select the Summary tab.
4. Set the measurements as not used for the statistics under Test
Settings.

417 FastReporter 3
 Working with PMD Files
Working with PMD Statistic Measurements

To view PMD measurement statistics:

1. Open a .pmdb measurement file.
2. Select more than one measurement to make the tab appear.
3. In the main window, select the Statistics tab.

Post-Processing Software 418

13 Using Instruments
(For PC Only)
You can directly connect the instrument and download the test
measurements from the executed jobs (Local Jobs). The instrument
(testing device) connected should be rescanned whenever the new test
measurement files need to be downloaded. Only the new files will be
downloaded and the previously downloaded files will be retained on your
system.

Note: For now, only the measurement files for the local jobs form the FIP-500
testing device are supported.

Note: While disconnecting devices, follow Windows standard practices for the
safety of your device and data.

Viewing and Modifying the local test

measurements
The test measurement files for the local jobs can be opened and modified
accordingly.
To fetch (download) the test measurements from the local jobs:
1. Connect the instrument to your system.
2. Select the Instrument menu, and then select the Synchronize
sub-menu.

Post-Processing Software 420

Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Viewing and Modifying the local test measurements

3. The instrument connected will be scanned, searched to connect and

synchronize with the FastReporter 3.
Select the device.

4. The connected devices to your system will be displayed once

detected. Select the required testing device.

Note: Select Rescan button if the device is not found or to fetch the latest data.

421 FastReporter 3
 Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Viewing and Modifying the local test measurements

5. Your system’s firewall blocks the access of your testing device at your
first connection attempt. Select Allow access to communicate it with
the FastReporter 3 application and add as a trusted device. Skip this
step if not asked.

6. Once connected, the Job name and the number of test measurements
available will be displayed for the selected device.

Post-Processing Software 422

Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Viewing and Modifying the local test measurements

7. Select the required job or select multiple jobs, and then select the
Download button. The selected jobs will be downloaded.

423 FastReporter 3
 Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Viewing and Modifying the local test measurements

Once downloaded, a message appears to confirm opening the

downloaded files for modification, select Yes to open and modify the test
measurements now. The files opened then can be modified and saved.

Post-Processing Software 424

Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Viewing and Modifying the local test measurements

Note: If you want to save the modified files, use Save As menu to save the file
with different file name or at a different location. You cannot save the
measurement files of the local jobs with the same file name.

425 FastReporter 3
 Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Updating the connected testing devices

Updating the connected testing devices

You can update the connected testing device if the update is available for
the device. You can do this by connecting it to the server or from your local
system if the system image package is available on your system. You can
use the advanced update to update the devices with a specific version or to
update from the system file if available locally.
To update the testing devices (default):
1. Connect the instrument to your system.
2. Select the Instrument menu, and then select the Update sub-menu.

The device connected will be scanned and searched. The connected

devices to your system will be displayed once detected.

Note: Select Rescan button if the device is not found.

Post-Processing Software 426

Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Updating the connected testing devices

Select the device.

3. Select the required testing device.

427 FastReporter 3
 Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Updating the connected testing devices

4. Your system’s firewall blocks the access of your testing device at your
first connection attempt. Select Allow access to communicate it with
the FastReporter 3 application and add as a trusted device. Skip this
step if not asked.

5. Once connected and if the update is available for the selected device,
it will be notified with the detailed information.

Post-Processing Software 428

Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Updating the connected testing devices

6. Select the update button for default update.

The device restarts after updating the required version.
To update the testing device (advanced):
1. Select the Advanced button from the software update screen.

2. You can proceed with various options as required:

429 FastReporter 3
 Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Updating the connected testing devices

 Standard option, select this option to have the default Update which
updates the device with the latest version available for the device.
Select the OK button after selecting the Standard option.
 Update ID option, select this option if you want to update the device
with a specific or precise version of the software. For this you should
have the update ID. select this option, enter the required Update ID
pin, and then select the OK button.
 Image from file option, select this option if you want to update the
device using the system image file (lib file) if available on your system.
Select this option, browse the file by selecting the Open button, and
then select the OK button.

Note: After updating the device, it will restart to apply the changes.

Post-Processing Software 430

Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Managing the Pass/Fail Criteria (Threshold Management) file (For FIP-500 only)

Managing the Pass/Fail Criteria (Threshold

Management) file
(For FIP-500 only)
You can delete/download/upload the threshold management file having
the pass/fail criteria from the selected device.
To Delete/Download/Upload the threshold management file from
the device:
1. Connect the testing device to your system.
2. Select the Instrument menu, and then select the Pass/Fail Criteria
sub-menu.

The device connected will be scanned and searched. The connected

devices to your system will be displayed once detected.

Note: Select Rescan button if the device is not found.

431 FastReporter 3
 Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Managing the Pass/Fail Criteria (Threshold Management) file (For FIP-500 only)

Select the device.

3. Select the required testing device.

The list Pass/Fail Criteria -Threshold Management files available on the
device appears.

Note: Accept and allow the Firewall setting to unblock the connection restriction if
asked.

Post-Processing Software 432

Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Managing the Pass/Fail Criteria (Threshold Management) file (For FIP-500 only)

4. Select the check-box associated with the Pass/Fail Criteria -Threshold

Management file and then select the required button accordingly.

 The Delete button, deletes the selected files from the device.
 The Download button, downloads the selected files to your system.

433 FastReporter 3
 Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Managing the Pass/Fail Criteria (Threshold Management) file (For FIP-500 only)

 The Upload button, will ask you to browse the new Pass/Fail Criteria
-Threshold Management file from your system. The selected file
uploads to the device.

Post-Processing Software 434

Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Sharing files with EXFO (For FIP-500 only)

Sharing files with EXFO

(For FIP-500 only)
You can download the required files and share them (through email) with
EXFO. The files downloaded can be attached as references to your queries.
For example, the log file of activities to troubleshoot, or a test files which
have conflictsor undesired results. etc.
To Download the files from the device:
1. Connect the testing device to your system.
2. Select the Instrument menu, and then select the Share with EXFO
sub-menu.

The device connected will be scanned and searched. The connected

devices to your system will be displayed once detected.

Note: Select Rescan button if the device is not found.

435 FastReporter 3
 Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Sharing files with EXFO (For FIP-500 only)

Select the device.

3. Select the required testing device.

The list of files available on the device appears.

Note: Accept and allow the Firewall setting to unblock the connection restriction if
asked.

Post-Processing Software 436

Using Instruments (For PC Only)
Sharing files with EXFO (For FIP-500 only)

4. Select the check-box associated with the file and then select the
Download button.

The files downloaded can be shared with EXFO through e-mail.

437 FastReporter 3
14 Generating Reports
FastReporter 3 can print and generate thee types of reports:
 Measurement report: This type of report contains one measurement
type and one measurement at a time.
 Summary report: This type of report combines different measurements
or several measurements of the same type.
 Reports as they are presented when using the OTDR, iOLM, OLTS and
FIP applications.
The following options are included in measurement and summary reports:

Property or Element Option

Tools properties Distance units
OTDR properties Pulse baseline
Events calculation and thresholds
Numeric values precision
Pass/Fail thresholds
Macrobend tolerances
OPM, PPM, iOLM, OLTS, FIP, CD, and Pass/Fail thresholds
PMD properties
Data graph Zoom

If you want to include other options in a report, you must modify the
associated report template. For more details, see Using Excel Report
Templates on page 453.
For examples of the reports that you can generate with FastReporter 3, see
Report Samples on page 466.

Post-Processing Software 438

Generating Reports
Generating Measurement or Summary Reports (Plus Mode)

Generating Measurement or Summary

Reports (Plus Mode)
You can easily generate a variety of reports in the following formats:

File Type Application

*.xls, *.xlsx, *.xlsm Microsoft Excel
*.pdf Adobe Reader

You can select in a list of available types of reports. Those you have used
last will be displayed in the shortcut window for quicker access.
To set up the report format:
1. If you have not done already, select the Report ribbon tab.
2. Under Format, select which type of report output you want.

3. Under Setup, select whether you want to start the application linked
with the report format or if you want to generate separate report files
for each measurement. In that case, the linked viewer will not open.

439 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Generating Measurement or Summary Reports (Plus Mode)

4. Indicate what will be used for the file name of the report in the list of
available choices.

To generate a report using the shortcut menu:

From the Report ribbon tab, select one of the types in the list. The report is
created using the settings you have selected.

To generate other types of reports:

1. Select measurements or files in the Measurements or Files tabs.
2. If you have not done so already, select the Report ribbon tab.
3. Under Select and Favorite Reports, click Select.

Post-Processing Software 440

Generating Reports
Generating Measurement or Summary Reports (Plus Mode)

4. If needed, select the location where to save the report.

5. Select a report template.

441 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Generating Measurement or Summary Reports (Plus Mode)

6. The report settings are the same that you have selected on the ribbon
tab, but you can modify them as needed.
You can select the Remember Report Setting option if required. This
will remember all your settings for your next sessions.

7. Enter a name for the report.

Post-Processing Software 442

Generating Reports
Generating Measurement or Summary Reports (Plus Mode)

8. In the File Type list, select whether you want to save the report as a
PDF, or Excel file.

Note: The templates that appear for selection are relevant to the selected file
types.

IMPORTANT
You should always enable macros in Microsoft Excel before
generating the report in that format. Refer to the Excel help for
information on how to enable macros.

9. Click OK.

Note: The application retains the file type selection, the location of report saving
folder, and the selected report template for your further sessions.

443 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Generating Individual Test Reports

Generating Individual Test Reports

You can create the individual test reports for the selected files.

Note: If multiple files are selected for the individual reports, all selected files
should be of the same file type.

Note: The individual report generation is not supported for the TestFlow Jobs for
now.

To generate the individual test reports

1. In the Reports menu, select the test measurement file or multiple test
measurements and then select the PDF Individual Report menu.

2. Select the location to save the reports, make a new folder if required,
and then select OK.

Post-Processing Software 444

Generating Reports
Generating Individual Test Reports

445 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Generating Application-Related Reports

Generating Application-Related Reports

Generating reports such as you would see on the OTDR, iOLM, OLTS and
FIP applications is done in a similar manner. The reports can be generated
in PDF, XML or MHTML formats.

Note: OLTS reports are available in PDF format only.

To generate an application-related report:

1. From the main window, select the ribbon tab corresponding to the
application you want to use, OTDR, iOLM, OLTS or FIP, then under
Tools, click their relative Generate Application Report.
OR
Select the Report ribbon tab, then under Application Reports, select
the one you want to use.
2. Select whether you want to put the report in the same location as the
source files, or select a new location.

Post-Processing Software 446

Generating Reports
Generating Application-Related Reports

3. Select the format you want to use to generate the report.

4. Select the items to include in the report. The list of available items will
vary depending on the application you have selected.

5. Click OK to generate the report.

447 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Importing and Exporting Templates

Importing and Exporting Templates

You can import existing templates you have elsewhere, or export them to
other locations easily.
To import a template:
1. Select the Report ribbon tab.
2. Under Management, select Import.

3. Click to access the file location.

Post-Processing Software 448

Generating Reports
Importing and Exporting Templates

4. Browse to the current location of the template, then select it.

You may have to change the file filter at the bottom of the window to
see the appropriate format.

5. Click Open.
The path of the template file to be imported is added.
6. To add the browsed template to your applications specific template
location, click Select associated with the Import in label.

7. Expand the Report Template folder structure, and then select the
required folder or add a new folder.
For example, if the template is for FIP test types, select FIP folder.

449 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Importing and Exporting Templates

Note: Click the folder icon at the bottom if you want to add a new folder, add a
folder name and import the template in it.

8. If desired, rename the template (File name).

9. Click Import.

Post-Processing Software 450

Generating Reports
Importing and Exporting Templates

To export a template to another location:

1. Select the Report ribbon tab.
2. Under Management, select Export.

Note: The name of the report automatically bears the word Copy to prevent
unintentional overwrites.

3. Select the location where you want to export the file.

451 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Importing and Exporting Templates

4. Select the report template you want to export.

5. Click Export.
6. Change the name if needed, then click Save.

Post-Processing Software 452

Generating Reports
Creating and Modifying Report Templates

Creating and Modifying Report Templates

You can create a new report template, or modify an existing report
template in Excel. To create a new report template, EXFO recommends
that you start with an existing FastReporter 3 report template and modify it
as required. This way you will have access to the database fields for
populating the report with measurement data. Once you are done, save it
using a different name that suits your testing needs.

Using Excel Report Templates

The default templates installed in FastReporter 3 are stored in
C:\ProgramData\Exfo\FastReporter 3\<Version>\ReportTemplate\English
Each template has two sheets:
 A configuration sheet where you can select different tag settings for the
report.
 A sheet with the actual report with all the “tags” that are used to
generate the required report.

Configuration
Report selection
selection

453 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

Using the Configuration Sheet

The configuration sheet contains three parts.
 Flags
 Sheet Details
 Filter Details
Flags are used to specify to Excel how to handle specific behavior as well
as data display. By default, you have access to two different flag settings,
Apply Thresholds and Cell Merging. These flag settings are visible in the
Configuration sheet. The table below contains details for each flag setting.

Setting Purpose Note

Apply Thresholds Apply pass/fail thresholds True = will use threshold
from FastReporter 3, that is from FastReporter 3
change font and False = no threshold
background color used in applied. It can use
the application. conditional formatting from
Excel.
Cell Merging Merges cells with matched To improve the
records. For example, if the performance, this option is
FiberID is the same for 3 always set to "False" in all
measurements, they are the report templates, except
merged into a single cell. in the FiberCharacteration
template. This should be set
to "True" when extra
processing is done with
Excel's Pivot table.

Post-Processing Software 454

Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

Some non-mandatory, or supportive flags, are hidden. One or more can be

added as needed.

Note: If the Excel sheet contains only an Image tag in cell A1, and that cell is
merged with other cell, then the image will not be displayed in the report.

Note: The setting name should be written in one block without spaces. They have
been separated on more than one text line in the table below for readability
purposes only.

Default
Setting Purpose
Value
DisplayOnlyMatched To specify if only the data common to both matched FALSE
Measurements measurements is to be displayed.
For example, if you match two measurements
containing common and different wavelengths
(measurement one has 1310, 1550 and 1625, while
measurement two has 1310, 1410 and 1625), and the
setting is set to true, the report data is displayed for
every distinct wavelength.
DisplayGraphPer To specify if a graph should be displayed for each FALSE
Measurement trace in the measurement, or if all measurements are
to be displayed in a single graph.
MeasurementPerSheet Maximum number of measurements allowed per Blank
sheet. A blank value indicates that there is no limit.
WavelengthPerSheet Maximum number of wavelengths allowed per Blank
sheet. A blank value indicates that there is no limit.
MeasurementTypes To specify which measurement type should be Blank
supported. A blank value indicates that it supports all
measurement types.

455 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

Default
Setting Purpose
Value
FillOnlyMatched To display data of common wavelengths. Used when FALSE
Wavelengths data is coming from different origins and common
wavelengths needs to be displayed.
For example, if your report includes iOLM, OTDR and
FIP files, The iOLM wavelengths are treated first, then
only the OTDR files with matching wavelengths.
FillMatchedOLM To display the details from two different iOLM files FALSE
Measurements with different directions in a single row.(Used in
InSingleRow iOLM cable summary reports).
MergeAllSheets To merge all sheets into the first sheet. FALSE
InSingleSheet
MergeSheets To merge sheets with the same identifiers. FALSE
ByIdentifier

The sheet details are used to specify if multiple sheets should be inserted.
This table is not mandatory and is hidden by default.
Once the SheetDetails table is displayed, you need to specify the fields
below to insert multiple sheets:
 SheetName: to specify the name of the sheet for which multiple sheets
are inserted. If you rename a sheet, you must also change it in the
sheet details to make sure that you generate multiple sheets in the
report.
 AddMultipleSheets: to specify if multiple sheets should be inserted.
 Tables (optional): to specify which tables are used in a particular sheet.
 PrimaryTable: to specify the table from which you have to use distinct
values and add multiple sheets for each value.
 PrimaryColumn: to specify the column name from the Primary table. A
new sheet is inserted for each distinct value of the PrimaryColumn.

Post-Processing Software 456

Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

Filter details are used to specify filter criteria. This is not mandatory, and
should be used when filters are required. Filter details are not hard coded.
You can specify the required filters; to do so the FilterDetails table must be
present in the report template.
The FilterDetails table is divided into three columns:
 SheetName
 Range
 Filters

The sheet name is used to specify the sheet name for which you want to
apply a filter. If you rename the sheet, you must change the name
accordingly in the FilterDetails table for it to be identified correctly and
apply the filters.

Note: It is not mandatory to specify sheet names if no filters are applied on that
sheet.

457 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

One sheet can have multiple filters.

The range indicates the address of the first cell and last cell for which you
want to apply the filter, separated by a colon. The range must exactly
match the range in the sheet; if you specify a filter range of $A$3:$C$3 and
the actual range in the FilterDetails table is $A$3:$F$3, the formula is not
applied because they are not considered as matching.
The filters are to specify conditions and support the AND and OR operators.
You need to provide TableName.FieldName as a field. For example,
OTDREventTable.IsEvent=true AND OTDREventTable.IsEventReflective
=true AND OTDREventTable.EventLossAtoBPassFailStatus='Fail'.
An additional sheet is available, the Table sheet. The Table sheet is
generated by a macro when a template is saved. It contains information on
different tags present in the template and it will be used to generate the
appropriate data set (result values) needed for the report.

Post-Processing Software 458

Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

By default, this sheet is hidden. To view it, right-click on the name of the
active sheet and select Unhide, then select Table and click OK.

Note: To create a new template, you must start from an existing template.
Otherwise the Table sheet will not be created and the template will not
work, as FastReporter 3 will not be able to generate the dataset needed.

Note: Since the Table sheet is be generated using a macro, you must enable
macros to modify it.

The Report sheet is where you can define how you want the output (the
report) to look like. The report sheet will contain different FieldName tags.
Field Name tags are the combination of TableName and ColumnName.
(TableName.ColumnName), for example, Identification.FiberID. You
should use the field names from the Universal sheet. For more information,
see Using the Universal Sheet on page 465.

459 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

You have to provide special prefixes and suffixes to the field name while
designing templates. These prefixes and suffixes are used to perform the
data insertion, and determine whether data should be filled in a single cell,
if multiple rows should be inserted, or a block should be repeated.
Tags are categorized in five groups:
 Single Cell
 Multi Row
 Multi Column
 Block
 Image
The single cell tag organizes data in a single cell.If multiple values are
available, they are separated by a semicolon. The prefix for this tag is <<,
and the suffix is >>.
Example: <<Identification.TestDate>>

Excel
template

Output in
the report

Post-Processing Software 460

Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

The multi-row tag inserts multiple rows in Excel. For example, if one file
has three measurements, three rows are inserted. The prefix for this tag is
$$, and the suffix is $$.
Example: $$OTDRSummary.Wavelength$$

Excel
template

Output in
the report

The multi-column tag is used to process one single tag at a time. It does
NOT insert new columns, but rather uses the existing columns. While
designing the template, you should make sure that there are enough empty
columns available after the Multi Column tag. If not, it will overwrite
existing data.
The prefix for this tag is {{ and the suffix is }}.
Example, {{OTDRSummary.Wavelength_FiberSize}}

Excel
template

Output in
the Report

461 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

The Block tag contains several other tags. It indicates a structure such as
that of the Event table, where you insert rows and columns. Only one block
tag group should be specified per sheet.

Note: These tags are supported for the OTDR Event table and iOLM Element and
Section tables.

The prefix for the block tag is ##, and the suffix is ##.
The prefix for inserting rows is [[, and the suffix is ]].
The prefix to insert column blocks is [[##, the suffix is ##]].

[[prefix and]] suffix to specify

field for which column should
be inserted.
[[##prefix and ##]] suffix to
specify fields for which values
should be filled for multiple
rows and columns.

To add multiple blocks, such as for the iOLM element and section table,
add a + sign between the prefix/suffix and the tag.
For example, adding a second block would look like this: [[+##tag##+]]
Adding a third block would look like this: [[++##tag##++]]
You do not need to add a + sign to add a row, as the number of rows will
remain the same in the case of multiple blocks.

Required Report
format

Post-Processing Software 462

Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

To add blocks for loss, reflectance and attenuation, you have to add blocks
for each wavelength. Fill the loss values first (insert a separate column for
each wavelength), then reflectance and then attenuation.

As mentioned in the figure above, for loss the tag is

 [[iOLMElementsSectionDetails.Wavelength]] - To add columns
 [[##iOLMElementsSectionDetails.ElementLoss##]] - To add data row
and column wise.
For the next block, you have to use the + sign. The next block tag will look
like:
 [[+iOLMElementsSectionDetails.Wavelength+]]
 [[+##iOLMElementsSectionDetails.ElementReflectance##+]]
To add one more block for attenuation, you have to add two + signs. The
next block tags will look like:
 [[++iOLMElementsSectionDetails.Wavelength++]]
 [[++##iOLMElementsSectionDetails. SectionAttenuation##++]]

463 FastReporter 3
 Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

In the case of multiple tags in a single cell, since the tag related to the loss
of an event/element or a section are not the same, you need to put the two
possibilities.

Since there is only one possibility for the reflectance, you simply have to
put the corresponding tag.

The image tag uses (( as a prefix, and )) as a suffix.

Example: ((iOLMGraph.GraphFromApplication))

Post-Processing Software 464

Generating Reports
Using Excel Report Templates

To modify an Excel report template:

1. Access the Excel report templates folder.
2. Create a copy of the report template that you want to modify.
3. Open the duplicate report template with Microsoft Excel.
4. Add new column information using the {{Tag}}. Refer to the Universal
sheet for the list of supported tags. You can remove a column by
deleting the cell contents.
5. Add new row information using the $$Tag$$. Refer to the Universal
sheet for the list of supported tags. You can remove the row
information by deleting the cell contents.
6. Change the logo using the header/footer option in Microsoft Excel.

Note: For more information on the Universal sheet, see Using the Universal Sheet
on page 465.

Using the Universal Sheet

The universal sheet provides the list of tags for different fields used in
FastReporter 3. You can use these tags to create custom report templates
for the fields such as GeneralSettings, MatchedFilesDetails,
CustomIdentifier, Identification etc. related to the OTDR, iOLM, OLTS, CD,
PMD, OPM/PPM, and FIP measurements. You can copy the supported tags,
which are highlighted in green, to customize your Excel report template.
You can access the universal sheet from C:\ProgramData\Exfo\FastReporter
3\<version>\ReportTemplate\English.

465 FastReporter 3
15 Report Samples
This section presents samples of some reports you can generate using
FastReporter 3. Keep in mind that those reports are samples and your final
results may differ depending on the options and number of files you have
selected. Various other report types are also available for your other testing
needs.

Post-Processing Software 466

Report Samples
Bidirectional OTDR

Bidirectional OTDR

   

        

       
     
 
  !  " #$ 
%$ $&'
$

       
 ($)$
  *& $ 

  +  ,$   !"

#$ ,-
%& 
"  .  /  $  ! 
            
'(  )
*+
!  !  *0 ,- ,-
.&
%
/
*
+   )1)  "  ,  ,
0
*1+ , , 23
)$ 4" , ,
#
*#+   +&)$ )$5 5$  " , ,
" 
*#+   06)) )$5 5$  "  ,  ,
7 $66  )$5 5$  " , ,

   !"

+&851"    +&$ " ,  
0
*2+ 
:; 8$ -1"  :;8&)$ " ,  34,
#
##
*2+ , 
# $  !"

%&  '  !"

   +
( ) * &  &    - &    
  $
     
,"
" " " " "
0  ( 5    
  ,-! ,! !,- !,- !,- !,-
70  (  5-! 5  !,-! 5  5!!
  , ,! !, , ! !, !,
70  ( ! 5 5  , 5!- 5-
  , - ,! !,! ,  !, !,
70  (  !5 ! 5  , 5- 5-
  , ,! !, ,  !,! !,
70  (  5 5  ,- 5! 5 -
  ,  ,! !, ,  !, !,
0  ( - 5!  ,   

+.$ $  !"

$ $  . / 

#
##
*2+  
2
#
##
*2+ , ,

 
##
*2+  
2
 
##
*2+ , ,
.&
# ,
,
*2$1+ , ,

##
*2+ , ,

 )
*1+ , ,



  




467 FastReporter 3
 Report Samples
OTDR

OTDR

*"+   ,--.  / 0  1

    
      
     
    !   " 
 # $% # $% #&
' # $%
 

  
       
(   
)"  
*  +!,-.+,/0(
1   # -&-.
 #     !22 345

 
1"    -62 7 /8    6 +97 $:  8 -6 +
1"    .!6. + /8  "   6. +
1"  );( -62- + * <  "   6!2& +




         /+ (1/    6& +97 /+ 8    6!. +97
6 .&6. /+ (1/   6 + ."  ,8 (  6... +
/ 6. 6 /+ );( ..6- + * <  =  -62 +
+ 6! 62!
# 6& 6..-

1    %   >  =.

Post-Processing Software 468

Report Samples
Fiber Characterization

Fiber Characterization

    

    

 

 

 

   

    !!  !! "    (  (   )(  "*(  (   ( !(!      2   
 

 "#$% %#$"  !! "#$% %#$"  !!   !!  !!   +, /00, /00,
'
 &% &% &% &% &% &% &% &% &% ' (!-.
 (!- (!-1' (! (!-'.

   !  """ """ # #! 

469 FastReporter 3
 Report Samples
Fiber Inspection Probe

Fiber Inspection Probe

    


  

 

       

  
   
     
 !  " #$$
%&  '
%()
*( ' ' +
%   , ')   &'   - (

       

%-.&'  /%  0 % /12+3
/! 1& ' -  '  

% , ' )(  0 0.  ' , , ' +)    *&  
 ' )(   & (  - '
 4. )(  % 4) , , ,
,&  5  6 1

  
 
  
    
             
     


 



 




Post-Processing Software 470

Report Samples
iOLM

iOLM

 (  0

    
       
        
    !  "#$  % &
'( )*
 

  
       
% 
+ ,!  , ,+-.
/   (  ! 0
 (       "#$

 
    

  
12 34 5  2
.67    %

   ! "   ! "  !

  5! 05 8
  5! 5!

" #$

/3  ;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;; *    8  3 < 

471 FastReporter 3
 Report Samples
OTDR Advanced Cable (Excel Template)

OTDR Advanced Cable (Excel Template)

This report displays various information related to the OTDR Advance
cable, such as: Cable information, Measurement information, Fail report,
Length, Reflectance, Splice and reflectance, Splice loss, Attenuation, and
Loss.

Post-Processing Software 472

Report Samples
iOLM + FIP (Excel Template)

iOLM + FIP (Excel Template)

This report displays the iOLMandFIP measurement values in single report
based on matching.If multiple measurements are selected, the report
displays multiple worksheets for the each of the selected measurements.
The worksheets are labeled as iOLM + FIP (n). Where, (n) represents the
measurement number.

473 FastReporter 3
 Report Samples
iOLM Bidirectional (Excel Template)

iOLM Bidirectional (Excel Template)

This report displays the Bidirectional measurement with corresponding
unidirectional measurements A-B and B-A.

Post-Processing Software 474

Report Samples
iOLM Advanced Cable Report (Excel Report)

iOLM Advanced Cable Report (Excel Report)

This report shows detailed information for your cables. Each category of
the report (cable information, measurement information, fail report,
summary results, link elements, splice elements, connector elements,
A & B elements, and attenuation section) is on a separate sheet.

475 FastReporter 3
 Report Samples
FIP-500 Multi Measurement Reports

FIP-500 Multi Measurement Reports

You can get the details of the defects and the fiber images that were
captured. After selecting the icon at the top right corner of the report,
you will be directed to the diagnostics of the measurement if available.

Post-Processing Software 476

Report Samples
FIP-500 Multi Measurement Reports

You can also have the FIP-500 Summary Report with Table of Contents
which are hyperlinked to the detailed reports. Use the FIP-500 with Table
of Contents template to get this report.
Click the hyperlinked identifiers to see the detailed reports.

477 FastReporter 3
 Report Samples
FIP-500 Multi Measurement Reports

You can also have the detailed report only that shows the information of
each fiber.Use the FIP-500 Multi Fiber template for these reports.

Post-Processing Software 478

Report Samples
FIP-500 Multi Measurement Reports

479 FastReporter 3
 Report Samples
FIP-500 Multi Measurement Reports

OLTS Reports
The OLTS MF Loss report shows the Network Application summary if
available in the measurement.

Post-Processing Software 480

16 Using the Validator (Plus
Mode)
The Validator lets you create a project file to select the data and values to
validate in your measurement files. This fully customizable tool can let you
find inconsistencies quickly. The tabs available in the Validator will depend
on which test types are installed (see Changing FastReporter 3 Options on
page 31 for details).

Note: The test measurement files from the FIP-500 testing device are not
supported for validation.

Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit),

Importing, Exporting Validator Project
You can create, customize by editing properties, import, and export the
Validator project.
To create and customize a Validator project:
1. If you have not done so already, select the Validator ribbon tab.
2. Click Define.

3. In the Validator assistant, select the General tab, then enter a name for
your project.

Post-Processing Software 482

Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

4. If you want to prevent users from editing the template, select the
corresponding option.

IMPORTANT
Selecting this option means that once you click Save, you cannot
edit the template anymore.

5. Select which measurement types you want to include in the template

by checking the corresponding option.

6. If you want to use reference files for your measurement types, select
them using the Open button corresponding to the one you want. Once
in the selection window, you can select the file or files needed.

483 FastReporter 3
 Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

Note: If there is one reference file, its values will be used to pre-fill the validation
items. If there is more than one reference files, the first instance of a value
will be used to pre-fill the validation items.

7. If you want the Validator to check for duplicate measurements, select

the corresponding option.

8. Click Identification tab.

Post-Processing Software 484

Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

9. Select the general identification values to include in the job. This

section is selected by default.

Note: If a reference file is set, the values are already pre-filled with the reference
file’s values. When more than one value is available, you can select which
one you want.

485 FastReporter 3
 Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

10. Select which identifiers you want to validate. This section is selected by
default.

You can also set the auto-incrementation values for the identifiers as
needed.

Note: If a reference file is set, the values are already pre-filled with the reference
file’s values. When more than one value is available, you can select which
one you want.

Post-Processing Software 486

Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

11. If you want the file naming components to be validated, enable the
corresponding section and select the desired components.

If you want to include the contents into the validation process, select
the corresponding option. Then, select if the validation will look for an
exact match whether it simply contains what you have entered.

487 FastReporter 3
 Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

12. Select each test type available in the list on the left and select the items
you want to include in the validation. For details on the items, see the
chapter corresponding to your test type.

13. Once you are done, click Save. The compliance list automatically
saved. If you want to do a duplicate of this configuration and save it
under another name, use Save As instead.

Note: While modifying the iOLM template, in the thresholds configuration section,
you can select the Apply Bidir and Unidir option to apply the individual
Bidir values along with Unidir values. After configuration, the validation for
the Bidir will be done according to the basis of separate loss-values instead
of their average loss values.

Note: While modifying the OTDR template, in the Events section, you can use the
Splitter detection table to update the threshold value. You can select
(check box in the Apply column) the respective Splitter ratio and then you
can modify the Threshold value for it. The threshold value cannot be more
than the next corresponding threshold value.

Post-Processing Software 488

Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

To view or modify an existing configuration template:

1. If you have not done so already, select the Validator ribbon tab.
2. Under Compliance Template select the desired template using the
Select button or the drop-down list.

3. Click View/Edit.

To export a configuration template:

1. If you have not done so already, select the Validator ribbon tab.
2. Under Management, select Export.

489 FastReporter 3
 Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

3. Select which template files you want to export, then click Export.

4. Go to the location where you want to save the templates, then click
OK.
To import a configuration template:
1. If you have not done so already, select the Validator ribbon tab.
2. Under Management, select Import.

3. Locate the template you want to use, then click Open.

To select a configuration template:
1. If you have not done so already, select the Validator ribbon tab.
2. Under Compliance Template, click Select.

Post-Processing Software 490

Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

3. Locate the file you want to use in the list, then click OK.

The selected template appears in the window.

To run a configuration template:
1. In the Files tab, select at least one file.
2. If you have not done so already, select the Validator ribbon tab.
3. Select the template you want to use for your compliance check.

4. Once you have modified or selected the template as needed, click

Start.

Note: The button is available if a template is selected and if at least one valid
measurement is selected in the Files tab.

491 FastReporter 3
 Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

If there were some issues found by the Validator, you will see a table
indicating which measurement is involved and a description of the
issue.

5. Some of the issues can be corrected automatically by the Validator and

are identified as such in the table. If you want the Validator to handle
them, click Auto Correct then confirm the action when prompted.
6. If you want to save an Excel copy of this report, click Save Excel
Report, then select a name and location for the file. This can be useful
for later consultation if you want to address the errors found in the
report.
7. Click Close to return to the application.

Post-Processing Software 492

Using the Validator (Plus Mode)
Creating (Define), Customizing (Edit), Importing, Exporting Validator Project

To delete a configuration template:

1. If you have not done so already, select the Validator ribbon tab.
2. Under Management, click Delete.

3. Select which templates you want to remove in the list, then click
Delete and confirm your choice.

493 FastReporter 3
17 Viewing and Editing
Measurements
Once you have added files to your list, you can view the results for the
measurements they contain in the Results window, as well as
identification information about them.
The tabs available depend on the measurement type selected. For
example, for OTDR measurements, in addition to the Identification and
Summary tabs, there is also the Event Table tab, and the Markers tab, if
available for the selected measurement.

Note: Now you can undo/redo the recently performed activities for the
Identification and Auto Documentation. Select CTRL+Z or select the
Undo icon from the ribbon bar. Also, to redo, select CTRL+Y or select the
Redo icon from the ribbon bar.

Post-Processing Software 494

Viewing and Editing Measurements

Editing Measurement Identification Information

You can edit several of the fields on the Identification tab in the Results
pane. Other fields are populated from information in the measurement file,
if present, and will appear shaded.
Your FastReporter 3 application allows you to edit the general identification
information for single-fiber as well as multiple-fiber connector FIP files. You
can also modify information specific to job files such as custom job
properties and job-related comments. The information you can edit will
depend on the type of file you are working on.
To edit the identification information:
1. Open the required file.
2. Select the measurements for which you want to view or modify the
identifier labels.
3. In the Results window, select the Identification tab.

495 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements

4. Click in the white section to the right of a field label to select it, then
enter the desired value.

Note: The identifier labels are not editable if iOLM measurements are selected
with any other type of measurement (for example, CD).

Note: When the identifier label is selected as None, the values are not editable.

Note: The maximum character limits for Job ID, Customer, Operators is 237
characters, while for all other identifiers refer the following table.

Post-Processing Software 496

Viewing and Editing Measurements

Modifying Additional Information

You can modify additional information for OLTS and OPM/PPM
measurements, such as comments relating to the cables or fibers.

Note: If a cable comment is present, the application merges this comment with
the comment of each fiber measurement of this cable. The cable comment
and the fiber comment are separated by a hyphen (-).

To modify the additional information:

1. Open the required file.
2. Select the Identification tab.
3. Click on the Comments field under the Additional Information
section to modify the additional information.

497 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Find and Replace

Find and Replace

You can find and replace the General Identifications, Identifiers, Identifier
Names, Identifier Values, and Comments.
Warning
The Redo/Undo feature will not available for the find and replace activities, and also
for the previous activities once the Find/Replace feature is selected.

To Find and Replace the parameters and values:

1. Go to Home menu, and then select the Replace sub-menu.

2. Select from the Find in drop down the required parameter category.

3. In the Find what text box, enter the label or value that you want to find.
4. If you want to replace the parameter or value entered in the Find what
text box, enter the label or value that you want to replace with in the
Replace with text box.

Post-Processing Software 498

Viewing and Editing Measurements
Find and Replace

5. Select Contains, Exact match, Match case options to filter or precisely

look for the parameter or value, and then select Find next or Find all.
The files that matches the selected parameters and filters will be listed
in the table below.
6. Select the required files from the list to replace the parameters or
values from them.

499 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Find and Replace

7. Select Replace, Replace all as required.

The replaced files with the replaced field name is displayed after
replacing. Verify the changes accordingly.

Post-Processing Software 500

Viewing and Editing Measurements
Search by keyword

Search by keyword
You can search the files with a keyword. The files with the matching
keyword will highlighted in the Files section. You can find in the keyword
from the General Identification, Identifiers, Comments, and File Name
parameters. You can filter the search having the contents, exact match, and
even match the case.
To search the files with the keyword:
1. Select the required files to that you want to search from.
2. On the Home menu, goto the Select Measurements By Keyword
menu.

3. On the Select Measurements By Keyword section, select the

parameter from the Find in drop-down list. to searchthe keyword from
the test parameters.

501 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Search by keyword

4. Type the keyword you want to search in the Find what text box.

5. If required, select Options to refine your search by selecting the

criteria other than Contains. select the Match case or Exact match
accordingly if required, and then select OK.

6. On returning, select the Select option from the Select Measurement

by keyword section.
The files matching the keyword and criteria are highlighted in the Files
section.

Post-Processing Software 502

Viewing and Editing Measurements
Search by keyword

503 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Modifying Summary Information (Plus Mode)

Modifying Summary Information (Plus Mode)

When viewing your test results, you can quickly find a summary of the
information, and modify the related test settings as needed to view the
impact on the measurement.

Note: The items displayed in the Summary tab will depend on the type of file you
are viewing.

To edit the summary information:

1. Open the desired file.
2. Select the measurement for which you want to view or modify the
summary information.
3. Click in the field to the right of the field label.
4. Enter a value.

Post-Processing Software 504

Viewing and Editing Measurements
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

You can view and sort files and measurements according various criteria,
depending on the type of file or measurements you are viewing. You can
sort the files according the header, or you can do manual sorting.
The available file types at the top window will determine which items are
displayed. Not all items are available for all measurement types.

Select which items to

view from the list. Right-click to select
Depending on which columns to display.
types of files are Change the order
displayed, the available by dragging the
items will differ. column to a new
location (available
for OTDR, iOLM and
Click to sort according
OLTS only).
to a specific column.
In the Files tab, you
Click and drag to change can select to display
position manually. the Identifiers
column.

Right-click to
select other
sorting criteria.

Note: During manual sorting, if the files are not adjacent, you need to group them
by pressing Ctrl+G.

When you have sorted one of the tabs, you can apply the same sorting
criteria to the two other tabs. This is particularly useful to send your criteria
to the Matched Files tab, since it is used to determine the order in which
the files appear in your reports.

505 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

To apply sorting to other windows:

1. If you have not done so already, select the Home ribbon tab.
2. Select the files in the Files window or measurements in the
Measurements window.
3. Under Sort, select which applies for your situation:
 If you have sorted the files, click Apply File Sorting to apply the
sorting to the Measurements and Matched Files tab.
 If you have sorted the measurements, click Apply Measurement
Sorting to apply the sorting to the Files and Matched Files tab.

Note: When files in the Matched Files tab are not of the same type and the
sorting is based on the Files or Measurements tabs, it may be possible that
the sorting is not exactly the same, as priority is granted to file type and
priority.

Note: You can modify the column width and position of the Files, Measurements,
and Identifiers column. In addition to this, show/hide the columns, and so
on. All these changes done are remembered for your further sessions.
These changes will be remembered even after modifying and repairing the
FastReporter 3 application.Managing Files

You can open single files for consultation and perform changes on them.

Note: If you have purchased the FC option, you can mange the files as part of
projects. For more information, see Working with Projects (Plus Mode) on
page 43

Post-Processing Software 506

Viewing and Editing Measurements
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

To open files:
1. From the main window, select the File ribbon tab, then Open.
2. Select whether you want to open your own files or sample files
provided with the application. You can also select the most recently
used files.
To close files:
1. Select the file or files that you want to close. If you want to close all of
them, you do not need to select any.
2. From the main window, select the File ribbon tab, then Close.
3. Select whether you want to close only the selected files or all of them.
If some were modified and you have not saved them, you will be
prompted to do so.
You can save the changes you make to selected measurement files or to all
measurement files in the current project.
When saving several files at a time, you can set an automated naming
pattern so that they all follow the same naming scheme. Depending on the
type of files you are saving, different items will be available in the window.
To save selected measurement files:
1. In the Files tab, select the file or files that you want to save.
2. Select the Files ribbon tab, then Save and Save Selected Files.

507 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

To save selected measurement files under a different name:

1. In the Files tab, select the files that you want to save.
2. Select the Files ribbon tab, then Save and Save Selected Files As.
3. Select the location for your files.

Post-Processing Software 508

Viewing and Editing Measurements
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

4. Select whether you want to use the original file names, or if you want
to use the file documentation elements. If you are using the original file
names, go to step 9. Otherwise, proceed as instructed below.

509 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

5. If your files are in OTDR format, you can select a different format to
which to save the files.

Post-Processing Software 510

Viewing and Editing Measurements
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

6. Select which items you want to include in the name. You can change
the order of the items using the arrow buttons.

511 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

7. Select the type of character you want to use as a separator between

the items.

Post-Processing Software 512

Viewing and Editing Measurements
Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements

8. If you have selected to add a custom field to the file name, you can
enter the value you want in the corresponding box.

9. Click Save to confirm your action.

Note: PMD files will be saved with the .pmdb extension, ConnectorMax files will
be saved with the .cmax2 extension, and OLTS files will be saved with the
.oltsx extension.

To save all files:

Select the Files ribbon tab, then Save and Save All. All measurement files
in the current project and the project file are saved.

513 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Using the Identifiers View

Using the Identifiers View

Another way to filter and sort your measurements can be according to the
identifiers included in them. These identifiers are displayed in a tree view
where you can expand or collapse results for easier management and
viewing purposes. When you click on a specific part of the tree view, the
resulting files are displayed in a table on the right of the tree. This table
behaves like the Measurement tab and allows you to perform the same
actions regarding sorting and selection.

Pass/fail
status

Parent
node

Child
node

The identifier information used to sort the measurements are found under
their respective Identification tabs. Each identifier down the list in the
table creates a node in the tree. The identifiers used for matching the files
are those you have selected as active in your project settings. See Matching
Files on page 55 for more information.

Post-Processing Software 514

Viewing and Editing Measurements
Using the Identifiers View

The items in the tree view also show pass/fail icons so that you can quickly
see if there are problems for specific measurements.
You can regroup identifiers, rename them, and move the measurements
within the tree to assign new identifiers to them. The identifiers used in the
list
To show and select measurements:
1. From the main window, select the Identifiers tab.
2. If you want to view only specific identifiers, right-click in the tree, click
Select Identifiers and then the ones you want to view.

3. Select the item you wish to view in the tree. All measurements on this
node, as well as those in the children nodes are displayed in the table
on the right. The identifiers used in the tree view are shown in a
column, you can therefore sort the results using this criterion.
You can select more than one node using the Ctrl key. The multiple
selection will work for nodes at the same level, with the same parent.

Note: You can sort the measurements in the table as you would in the
Measurements tab. See Viewing and Sorting Files or Measurements on
page 505.

515 FastReporter 3
 Viewing and Editing Measurements
Using the Identifiers View

To move measurements within a same branch:

1. Click on the node or measurements to select them.
2. Drag them to the desired node. The information will be updated
automatically.

IMPORTANT
The identifier information previously contained in the files you are
moving will be replaced with the identifier information of the new
node.

3. Confirm the move.

To change the identifiers of all measurements in a specific node:
1. In the tree, select the node that you want to change by right-clicking on
it.
2. Select Rename.
3. Enter the desired new name.
The values in the Identification tab are changed for each
measurements and the nodes are updated according to the new
name.

Post-Processing Software 516

18 Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Tools are available to help you better manage your data:

Setting a Reference File or Measurement (Plus

Mode)
A reference file is used to compare fibers within the same cable, monitor
fiber deterioration or compare fibers before and after installation. Once a
measurement file has been added to a project, you can set it as a reference
file. The reference file can then be used to automatically document other
measurement files (see Automatically Documenting Measurement Files
(Plus Mode) on page 519).
For supported OTDR file formats, FastReporter 3 will display the reference
measurement, in red, in the Event Table. The reference measurement can
then be applied as a template (see Setting and Applying OTDR/OTDR Bidir
Reference as Template (Plus Mode) on page 184). You can set a file as a
reference if the file format supports applying a reference as a template.

Post-Processing Software 518

Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Automatically Documenting Measurement Files (Plus Mode)

Automatically Documenting Measurement

Files (Plus Mode)
The auto documentation feature can be used to copy selected
identification information from a reference file to selected files. You can
also use this feature to automatically assign fiber IDs to selected files.

Note: The auto documentation tool is available even if no reference file is

defined; in that case, you cannot copy reference file information to files, but
you can assign fiber IDs automatically if your selected files contain at least
one fiber ID identifier.

Note: Now you can undo the recently performed activities for the Identifiers and
Auto Documentation. Select CTRL+Z or select the Undo icon from the
ribbon bar.To use the auto documentation feature:

1. In the Files window, select the file that will serve as the reference file.
2. From the File ribbon tab, click Set as Reference File.
3. In the Files window, select the files to which you want to export the
information.
4. Select the Home tab.
5. Under Tools, select Auto Documentation.

519 FastReporter 3
 Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Automatically Documenting Measurement Files (Plus Mode)

6. To copy items from the reference trace to your selected file, enable the
corresponding option, then select the desired items.

The file information options listed are the identifiers included in the
reference file and will differ depending on the file type.
7. Select whether you want to copy the fiber IDs or all of the identifiers for
all the files.

Post-Processing Software 520

Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Automatically Documenting Measurement Files (Plus Mode)

 If you are copying the fiber IDs, enter a prefix and suffix, and select
the number of digits and increment value to use.

 If you are using all of the identifiers, select which values to use in
the list. You can modify the ID or start and stop values, indicate
whether they will be incremented automatically, and what step
value to use if that is the case. You can also set the levels of the
identifiers to increment simultaneously at same order. For
example, if you set the level of Cable ID and Fiber ID at level 1
order, the auto-increment values (range) of these identifiers will
increment simultaneously at level 1 order. Two or more identifiers
can be set to same level of increment.

521 FastReporter 3
 Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Automatically Documenting Measurement Files (Plus Mode)

The start and stop values can be either numeric or alphabetic

If you enter items separated by semicolons in the Values cell, this
is the sequence that will be used for incrementation.
If your selection includes PPM files, OLT, ONT and location
identifiers are displayed.
If your selection includes OTDR, CD, PMD or OLTS files, Cable ID,
Fiber ID, Location and Location B identifiers are displayed.
If your selection includes only iOLM and FIP files, custom
identifiers are displayed; you will be able to change their names as
needed.

Note: The information is copied to the selected files only if they contain the
corresponding field.

8. Click OK.

Post-Processing Software 522

Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Using the Duplicated Measurements Tool (Plus Mode)

Using the Duplicated Measurements Tool (Plus

Mode)
Sometimes, you might need to verify if tests were actually performed on
fibers and that the analysis or results were not just copied and pasted there
for speedy execution purposes. The duplicated measurements tool can
help you to quickly locate such files.
When you select at least two measurement files, you can have
FastReporter 3 automatically compare them and indicate which files show
the same acquisition time, measurement wavelength and module serial
number. These files can then be selected automatically so you do not have
to look for them through your list, and batch processed.

Note: For the FIP, the application will match the fiber ID, test configuration name
and test date/time of the measurement to mark the measurements as
duplicated.

Note: In the case of bidirectional OTDR files, both directions are analyzed
separately.

To search for duplicated information in files:

1. Open the files on which you want to use the tool.
2. Select the desired measurements.

523 FastReporter 3
 Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Using the Duplicated Measurements Tool (Plus Mode)

3. Select the Home tab.

4. Under Tools, select Duplicated Measurements.

Post-Processing Software 524

 The files are analyzed and the result appears on-screen. The duplicate
measurement tool will display the unit serial number, test date/time,
identifiers, and filename details.

5. By clicking Select Duplicate Measurements, you will automatically

pick the detected files in the Measurements tab.
6. Proceed with any batch operation you want to perform for those files.

Using the Clipboard (Plus Mode)

You use the clipboard tools to copy and paste information you enter in the
Results tab, delete measurements or files from the list, or select items
quickly if they have the same type or date for example.
You can also copy the measurement graph from FastReporter 3 and paste it
at your required place, for example, into an e-mail message, or an
application such as Microsoft Excel for use in existing measurement
reports.
To use the clipboard with a measurement graph:
1. Select the Home ribbon tab.
2. Click on the graph.
3. Under Clipboard, click Copy.
4. Goto the application where you want to paste the graph into (e-mail
client, spreadsheet, word processing application, etc.).
 Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Using the Clipboard (Plus Mode)

5. Place the mouse pointer where you want to insert the graph, and on
the application’s Edit menu, click Paste.

Post-Processing Software 526

Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Using the Clipboard (Plus Mode)

Exporting the measurements to JSON extension

You can also export the iOLM, FIP-500, OPM-MF, PPM1, and iOLTS
measurement files to the JSON Extension file.
To export the .fip file to JSON:
1. On the ribbon bar, go to File > Export, and the select Export to JSON.

On the explorer window that opens, browse the required location to save
the exported file, change the file name if required, and then select Save.
The exported FIP file will be saved in JSON format at the selected location.

527 FastReporter 3
 Using FastReporter 3 Tools
Using the Clipboard (Plus Mode)

Uploading the file to EXFO Exchange

You can upload the file to your EXFO Exchange.
To upload the file to your EXFO Exchange.
1. Open the required files in FastReporter.
2. In the Files section, right click the file that you want to upload and then
select the Upload to EXFO Exchange option.

Note: The files that are not uploaded to the server are listed for your reference if
any error occurs or if the files you are uploading are not supported.

Post-Processing Software 528

19 FastReporter 3 Examples
This chapter walks you through the tasks required to create and modify
projects, reports, and templates. Detailed procedures are provided for
creating the following examples:
 Creating an OTDR Bidirectional project: Create an OTDR project with
OTDR traces going in both directions (that is, from A to B and from B
to A).
 Creating a project template: Create a project template containing the
properties and settings that you often use in your projects.
 Creating a fiber characterization report: Create a printed or electronic
fiber characterization report based on selected measurements.

Post-Processing Software 530

FastReporter 3 Examples
Creating an OTDR Bidirectional Project

Creating an OTDR Bidirectional Project

You can change the directions of the OTDR files and create bidirectional
projects.
To create an OTDR Bidirectional project:
1. On the File ribbon tab, select New, then Project.
2. In the list, select the template you want to use.

3. Click OK.
4. On the File ribbon tab, select Open, then File.
5. Select the OTDR files to be added to the project. The selected files are
highlighted.
6. Click Open.
7. In the Files tab, select the file or files for which you want to change the
direction.

531 FastReporter 3
 FastReporter 3 Examples
Creating a Project Template

8. Select the Home ribbon tab, then under Direction select A->B or B->A
as needed.

Creating a Project Template

You can save the properties and settings you often use when creating
projects in a project template. For example, you can save the pass/fail
thresholds that you often use in your OTDR projects in an OTDR project
template.
To create a project template:
1. From the File ribbon tab, select New, then Project.
2. In the list, click a template. Use an existing template that already
contains some of the properties and settings that you want to use as a
starting point, if applicable.

3. Click OK.

Post-Processing Software 532

FastReporter 3 Examples
Creating a Project Template

4. In the Home ribbon tab, select Settings.

5. Under the Identification tab, enter the information to identify your

template. Click into each item to activate it, then type in the
information.

6. When you have finished making changes to the project properties,

click OK.
7. On the File ribbon tab, click Save As, then Project As Template.

533 FastReporter 3
 FastReporter 3 Examples
Creating a Project Template

8. In the File name box, type a name for the project template file.

IMPORTANT
FastReporter 3 automatically saves project templates in the Project
Template folder. If you change the location, the template will not be
available for selection in the New Project dialog box when you start
a new project.

9. Click Save.
10. On the File ribbon tab, select New, then Project.
11. To set the new project template as the default template, click the file
name, and click Set as Default.

12. Click OK to start a new project or Cancel if you do not wish to start a
new project at this time.

Post-Processing Software 534

FastReporter 3 Examples
Creating a Fiber Characterization Report

Creating a Fiber Characterization Report

Throughout the network life cycle, fiber characterization reports are
essential for avoiding delays in service provisioning before system
component installation, in results comparison for post-installation
troubleshooting, and in ongoing network analysis and trending.
To create a fiber characterization report:
1. On the File ribbon tab, select New, then Project.
2. In the list, click the template you want to use.

3. Click OK.
4. On the File ribbon tab, select Open, then File.
5. Select multiple CD, OLTS, PMD, iOLM or OTDR files.

Note: You must select files with matching fiber IDs and Cable IDs.

6. Click Open to add the selected files to the project.

535 FastReporter 3
 FastReporter 3 Examples
Creating a Fiber Characterization Report

7. In the Home ribbon tab, select Settings.

8. Under the File Matching tab, click By information present in file.

9. Click OK.

Post-Processing Software 536

FastReporter 3 Examples
Creating a Fiber Characterization Report

10. In the Measurements tab, select the measurements you want to

include in the report.

11. To print or create an electronic version of the report, follow the

appropriate procedure below.
12. Select the Report ribbon tab, then click From New Template.

537 FastReporter 3
 FastReporter 3 Examples
Creating a Fiber Characterization Report

13. In the list, select Template.

14. The report is generated according to the selected template.

Post-Processing Software 538

20 Troubleshooting
The table below presents common problems and their solutions.

Problem Solution
I have trouble  Remove the old version before installing the new version.
installing the  Turn off your anti-virus program and try to install the
application application again.
I cannot see my files Some file formats, such as CD and PMD, or older OTDR files,
in the application cannot be viewed in the 64-bit version of the application. Try to
open them in the 32-bit version of the application.
In the case of the older OTDR files, you can try to save them in a
newer format in the 32-bit version of the application, then open
them in the 64-bit version of the application.
I cannot open an If the CylancePROTECT anti-virus is installed in the
OTDR file. system/computer on which FastReporter 3 is running, you need to
add the agiledotnetrt64.dll and agiledotnetrt.dll files in the
exclusion list.
To add dll files in the exclusion list, contact your IT support team.
I cannot activate In FastReporter 3, select the File menu, then Support and Install
FastReporter 3 with FastReporter USB Dongle Driver. Once the installation is
my USB key because complete, restart the application.
it is not recognized.

Consulting the Online Help

Help for FastReporter 3 is available directly in your application.
To refer user guide:
On the ribbon bar, go to File > Support > Help.
OR, on Ribbon bar, select icon, next to your Login name (Workspace)

Post-Processing Software 540

Troubleshooting
Consulting Information About FastReporter 3

Consulting Information About FastReporter 3

You can view information about your application, such as the version
number and remaining trial period days if you have not activated. It also
has the information to help you should you need to contact the technical
support team.
To display the information about FastReporter 3:
On the ribbon bar, go to File > Support > About FastReporter.

Contacting the Technical Support Group

To obtain after-sales service or technical support for this product, contact
EXFO at one of the following numbers. The Technical Support Group is
available to take your calls from Monday to Friday, 8:00 a.m. to 7:00 p.m.
(Eastern Time in North America).

Technical Support Group

400 Godin Avenue 1 866 683-0155 (USA and Canada)
Quebec (Quebec) G1M 2K2 Tel.: 1 418 683-5498
CANADA Fax: 1 418 683-9224
[email protected]

541 FastReporter 3
A Description of Event Types
This section describes all types of events that may appear in the events
table generated by the application. Here is a guide to the descriptions:
 Each type of event has its own symbol.
 Each type of event is represented by a graph of a fiber trace, which
illustrates the power reflected back toward the source as a function of
distance.
 An arrow points to the location of the event type in the trace.
 Most graphs show one complete trace; that is, an entire acquisition
range.
 Some graphs show only a portion of the entire range to view events of
interest more closely.

Post-Processing Software 542

Description of Event Types

Span Start
The Span Start of a trace is the event that marks the beginning of the fiber
span. By default, the Span Start is placed on the first event of a tested fiber
(typically the first connector of the OTDR itself).
You can make another event the start of the span you want to focus your
analysis on. This will set the beginning of the events table at a specific
event along the trace.

Span End
The Span End of a trace is the event that marks the end of the fiber span. By
default, the Span End is placed on the last event of a tested fiber, and is
called the end-of-fiber event.
You can also make another event the end of the span you want to focus
your analysis on. This will set the end of the events table at a specific event
along the trace.

Short Fibers
You can test short fibers with the application. You can even define a fiber
span for short fibers by placing the span start and the span end on the same
event.

543 FastReporter 3
 Description of Event Types
Continuous Fiber

Continuous Fiber
Reflected power
(dB)

Continuous
fiber

Distance
(km)

This event indicates that the selected acquisition range was shorter than
the fiber length.
 The fiber end was not detected because the analysis process ended
before reaching the end of the fiber.
 The acquisition distance range should therefore be increased to a
value greater than the fiber length.
 There is no loss or reflectance specified for continuous fiber events.

Post-Processing Software 544

Description of Event Types
End of Analysis

End of Analysis
Reflected power
(dB)

Distance
(km)

This event indicates that the pulse width used did not provide enough
dynamic range to get to the end of the fiber.
 The analysis ended before reaching the end of the fiber because the
signal-to-noise ratio was too low.
 The pulse width should therefore be increased so the signal reaches
the end of the fiber with a sufficient signal-to-noise ratio.
 There is no loss or reflectance specified for end-of-analysis events.

545 FastReporter 3
 Description of Event Types
Non-Reflective Event

Non-Reflective Event

Reflected power
(dB)

Non-reflective
event

Linear downward slope

due to Rayleigh
backscatter

Distance
(km)

This event is characterized by a sudden decrease in the Rayleigh

backscatter signal level. It appears as a discontinuity in the downward
slope of the trace signal.
 This event is often caused by splices, macrobends, or microbends in
the fiber.
 A loss value is specified for non-reflective events. There is no
reflectance specified for this type of event.
 If you set thresholds, the application indicates a non-reflective fault in
the events table, whenever a value exceeds the loss threshold.

Post-Processing Software 546

Description of Event Types
Reflective Event

Reflective Event
Reflected Clipped level
power (dB)
Reflective events

Distance
(km)

Reflective events appear as spikes in the fiber trace. They are caused by an
abrupt discontinuity in the index of refraction.
 Reflective events cause a significant portion of the energy initially
launched into the fiber to be reflected back toward the source.
 Reflective events may indicate the presence of connectors,
mechanical splices, or even poor-quality fusion splices or cracks.
 Normally, loss and reflectance values are specified for reflective
events.
 When the reflective spike reaches the maximum level, its top may be
clipped due to the saturation of the detector. As a result, the dead zone
(minimum distance for making a detection or attenuation
measurement between this event and a second nearby) may be
increased.
 If you set thresholds, the application indicates a reflective fault in the
events table, whenever a value exceeds reflectance or connector loss
thresholds.

547 FastReporter 3
 Description of Event Types
Positive Event

Positive Event
Reflected power
(dB)

Positive event

Distance
(km)

This event indicates a splice with an apparent gain, due to the junction of
two fiber sections having different fiber backscatter characteristics
(backscatter and backscatter capture coefficients).

Post-Processing Software 548

Description of Event Types
Launch Level

Launch Level
Reflected power
(dB)

Launch level
event position Second event

Launch
level

Linear area

Distance
(km)

This event indicates the level of the signal launched into the fiber.
 The figure above shows how the launch level is measured.
A straight line is plotted using least-square approximation to fit all trace
points in the linear area between the first and second detected events.
The straight line is projected toward the Y-axis (dB) until it crosses the
axis.
The crossing point indicates the launch level.
 <<<< in the events table indicates that the launch level is too low.

549 FastReporter 3
 Description of Event Types
Fiber Section

Fiber Section
Reflected power
(dB)

Fiber Fiber
section section

Distance
(km)

This symbol denotes a fiber section with no event.

 The sum of all fiber sections contained in an entire fiber trace equals
the total fiber length. Detected events are distinct even if they cover
more than one point on the trace.
 A loss value is specified for fiber section events. No reflectance is
specified for this type of event.
 The attenuation (dB/distance in kilometers) is obtained by dividing the
loss by the fiber section length.

Post-Processing Software 550

Description of Event Types
Merged Event

Merged Event
Reflected power
(dB)

Reflective events

Point A
Total loss ( dB)

Point B
Merged Reflective event position Distance
(km)

This symbol denotes an event combined with one or more other events. It
also indicates the total loss produced by the merged events following it in
the events table.
 A Merged Event is composed of subevents. Only the Merged Event is
attributed a number in the events table, not the subevents composing
it, if they are displayed.
 Reflective events may indicate the presence of connectors, mechanical
splices, or poor-quality fusion splices or cracks.
 Non-reflective events may indicate the presence of splices, splitters or
bendings.
 A reflectance value is specified for all merged events and indicates the
maximum reflectance for the merged event. A reflectance value is also
displayed for each reflective subevent composing the Merged Event.

551 FastReporter 3
 Description of Event Types
Merged Event

 The total loss ( dB) produced by the events is measured by plotting

two straight lines.
 The first line is plotted by fitting, through least-square
approximation, trace points in the linear area preceding the first
event.
 The second line is plotted by fitting, through least-square
approximation, trace points in the linear area following the second
event. If there were more than two merged events, this line would
be plotted in the linear area following the last merged event. This
line is then projected toward the first merged event.
 The total loss ( dB) equals the power difference between the
point where the first event begins (point A) and the point on the
projected straight line located just below the first event (point B).
 No loss value can be specified for the subevents.

Post-Processing Software 552

Description of Event Types
Merged Event

Pass/Fail Tests
As an example about pass/fail tests, let us consider the situation below:

Merged event

Merged sub-events:
2 reflective losses
1 non-reflective loss

Thresholds:
Event loss Reflective loss: 0.5 dB
Non-reflective Loss: 0.2 dB

For a merged event, it is possible to determine the global event loss, but not
the contribution of each sub-event. This is why the pass/fail test may
sometimes lead to “false positive” or “false negative” results.
When evaluating event status against thresholds, we are faced with two
possible conditions:
 All event types are tested (reflective, non-reflective)
 Only some event types are selected (for example, you could decide not
to test reflective loss)
The third case would be to test none of the event types, which means the
same as not wanting to know the status of the events.

553 FastReporter 3
 Description of Event Types
Merged Event

All Event Types Are Tested

In the first case, where all event types are tested, the pass/fail conditions
are as follows:
 If the event loss is less than or equal to the smallest threshold value,
then the event status is Pass.
 If the event loss is greater than the sum of the number of sub-events of
a type, multiplied by the threshold value for this event type, then the
event status is Fail.
 If the event loss is “in between”, since it is not possible to know exactly
the weight of a sub-event in the merged event, the global event is
considered to have a status of Pass.

Pass/Fail Analysis 0 Fail Level

Pass =(Nsub x Thsub)
0.2
= (2 x 0.5) + (1 x 0.2)
= 1.2
Pass

1.2
Fail

If the merged event loss is smaller than or equal to 1.2, then the status is
Pass. Otherwise, it is Fail.

Post-Processing Software 554

Description of Event Types
Merged Event

Not All Event Types Are Tested

In this situation, the only thing that we can clearly know is when the loss
has a Pass status. If the global event loss is less than or equal to the
smallest threshold value (a value that is tested, of course), we are sure that
the merged event status is Pass. Otherwise, we cannot know, so the status
of the event is Unknown.
In our example, if we suppose that you chose not to test non-reflective
losses, then the analysis would be done as shown below:

0
Pass
0.5

1.2 Unknown

555 FastReporter 3
 Description of Event Types
Merged Event

Effect of Event Status in the Global Trace Status

 A trace status is, by default, set to Unknown.
 If a trace is set to Fail once, it remains with that status (it cannot be set
back to Pass or Unknown).
 Whenever an event status is Fail, so is the trace status.
 If an event status is Pass, the trace status can change from Unknown to
Pass.
 If an event status is Unknown, the trace status remains the same. In
other words, the event, in this case, has no influence on the trace
status.
To avoid Unknown statuses, do not unselect loss thresholds individually.

Post-Processing Software 556

Description of Event Types
Echo

Echo

Reflected power
(dB)

OTDR connector

Second connector

End connector

Echo

Lightwave travel
Distance
(km)

This symbol indicates that a reflective event has been detected after the
end of the fiber.
 In the example above, the launched pulse travels up to the end
connector and is reflected back toward the OTDR. Then, it reaches the
second connector and is reflected again toward the end connector. It is
then reflected back to the OTDR.
 The application interprets this new reflection as an echo because of its
characteristics (reflectance and particular position with respect to
other reflections).
 The distance between the second connector reflection and the end
connector reflection is equal to the distance between the end
connector reflection and the echo.
 There is no loss specified for echo events.

557 FastReporter 3
 Description of Event Types
Reflective Event (Possible Echo)

Reflective Event (Possible Echo)

Reflected power
(dB)
OTDR connector

Second connector

Third connector

Reflective event (possible echo)

Distance
(km)

This symbol indicates a reflective event that can be a real reflection or an

echo produced by another stronger reflection located closer to the source.
 In the example above, the launched pulse hits the third connector, is
reflected back to the OTDR and reflected again into the fiber. It then
reaches the third connector a second time and is reflected once more
to the OTDR.
The application would therefore detect a reflective event located at
twice the distance of the third connector. Since this event is almost null
(no loss), and since its distance is a multiple of the third connector
distance, the application would interpret it as a possible echo.
 A reflectance value is specified for reflective events (possible echo).

Post-Processing Software 558

B Measuring Chromatic
Dispersion: Theory
EXFO’s Chromatic Dispersion Analyzer applies the phase-shift method,
which consists of measuring the phase variation of a sinusoidal intensity
modulated signal at a specific wavelength to obtain the relative group
delay of a fiber. The derivative of the relative group delay calculated from
fitted equations on computed results gives the dispersion, the
zero-dispersion wavelength and the dispersion slope.

Method Behind the Chromatic Dispersion

Analyzer
In EXFO’s Chromatic Dispersion Analyzer, the light source is a broadband
source, which is intensity modulated at a high frequency. This light is
injected into the fiber under test and the modulated light travels along the
fiber. The high-frequency intensity modulation propagates at a speed that
depends on wavelength and polarization. Values are obtained for the
differences in travel time between modulations at different wavelengths.
The higher the number of wavelengths at which this is done, the more
accurate the chromatic dispersion results will be.
The first fixed filter in the receiver extracts the portion of the light that will
follow an optical path. A second filter, which is a time-tunable filter, will
extract a second part of the original signal and then follow a different
optical path.
Different path combinations are added using a chopper. The amplitude of
the high-frequency signals are measured and digitized. The phase
difference is then computed using the different amplitudes. This value is
stored along with the tunable filters position and a new measurement
cycle begins. A new time delay is computed and stored with wavelength
data. When sufficient data is accumulated, chromatic dispersion can be
computed.

Post-Processing Software 560

Measuring Chromatic Dispersion: Theory
Using Data Fits to Obtain Dispersion

Using Data Fits to Obtain Dispersion

This section gives you details about the way EXFO uses the data fits to
obtain dispersion. Once group delays are computed, equations are fitted in
order to obtain dispersion, dispersion slope and zero-dispersion
wavelengths. The dispersion curve of typical singlemode fibers follows
certain equations used to interpolate zero-dispersion wavelength and
slope. The following table graph shows the equations applied to
singlemode fibers in specific wavelength ranges.

Fiber Type and

Expression for D
Wavelength Range
G.652 NDSF 2 –2
    = A + B + C
1200 nm    1600 nm D    = 2  B – C 
–3

G.653 DSF     = A + B + C
2

1500 nm-1600 nm
D    = 2B + C
G.655 NZDSF  D  1560  – D  1530   
D    =  -------------------------------------------------    – 1560   + D  1560 
up to 1560 nm 30
 

G.655 NZDSF

 D  1565  – D  1530   
1530 nm-1565 nm (C Band) D    =  -------------------------------------------------    – 1565   + D  1565 
 35 

1565 nm-1625 nm (L Band) 

 D  1625  – D  1565  
D    =  -------------------------------------------------    – 1625   + D  1625 
 60 

561 FastReporter 3
 Measuring Chromatic Dispersion: Theory
Using Data Fits to Obtain Dispersion

Fiber Type and

Expression for D
Wavelength Range
G.653 DSF     = A + B + C ln   
D    = B + C + C ln   

1200 nm    1600 nm

50/125 2 –2
    = A + B + C
50nm    1450nm –3
D    = 2  B – C 

62.5/125 2 –2
    = A + B + C
750nm    1450nm D    = 2  B – C 
–3

G.655 NZDSF  D  1565  – D  1530   

D    =  -------------------------------------------------    – 1565   + D  1565 
1530 nm-1565 nm  35 

Post-Processing Software 562

Measuring Chromatic Dispersion: Theory
Helping You Manage Chromatic Dispersion

As the previous table demonstrates, specific fits are recommended for

specific types of fiber and specific wavelength ranges. Fits should be used
carefully when extrapolating parameters to obtain maximum precision.
 The 3-Term Sellmeier applies mostly to standard fibers with single zero
dispersion at 1300 nm.
 The 5-Term Sellmeier has five zero crossings. Since it is extremely
elastic, it should be used with caution when extrapolating because the
fit may curve away from the true results beyond fitted points.
 The same warning applies to the cubic fit.
 The lambda-log-lambda fit is applicable to dispersion-shifted fibers
with a zero dispersion wavelength in the 1550 nm wavelength region.
 The linear fit is useful when there are too few measurements for
multiple parameter fits to be used. It is applicable to all fibers if the
range is sufficiently small.
The fits will give you a tool to obtain the dispersion slope and zero-
dispersion point.

Helping You Manage Chromatic Dispersion

The zero-dispersion wavelength (where dispersion is at zero) corresponds
to the wavelength point at which the fiber under test reaches its maximum
bandwidth.The slope from this zero-dispersion point indicates how fast
dispersion rises as wavelength increases. Key chromatic dispersion
parameters are the dispersion zero and the slope at zero dispersion.
Getting precise chromatic dispersion parameters helps you choose the
right dispersion-compensated fiber or material in order to reverse the
dispersion and dispersion slope before the data is interpreted by the
receiver at the other end of the line.
The effects of chromatic dispersion decrease with a reduction in the
absolute value of the fiber chromatic dispersion or with dispersion
compensation.

563 FastReporter 3
C Measuring Polarization Mode
Dispersion: Theory
The dispersion phenomenon is described as a number of
non-intensity-dependant physical occurrences resulting directly in signal
loss (pulse spreading or time jitter in a digital system; distortion in an
analog system). PMD is an important type of signal dispersion. As
unrepeated link distances are increased and transmission rates pushed
upwards, PMD can significantly reduce system performance.
To better understand the impact of PMD, consider the example of a pulse
passing through a wave plate. Upon entering the wave plate, the pulse is
decomposed into polarization components aligned with each of the two
birefringent axes of the plate (known as the fast and slow axes). The
components propagating independently through the wave plate at different
group velocities will recombine at the end of the wave plate as a
superposition of two pulses split in time.
The delay between those pulses is designated as the differential group
delay (DGD) and is written as . For a Gaussian, unchirped input pulse
of rms width , the rms width at the output is given by

2 2 2
 =  0 + r 0  1 – r 0   

where r is the fraction of the input-pulse energy launched into one of the
birefringence axes.
Worst-case spreading occurs when the signal is perfectly split in two
(r = 1/2), while no spreading occurs if the input state of polarization
(SOP) of the launched signal is aligned with one of the birefringence axes.
To generalize this example, consider a long, weakly birefringent
telecommunications fiber as a concatenation of many, randomly
orientated birefringent wave plates. Each interface between two wave
plates redistributes the optical energy along both axes of the subsequent
wave plate. This transfer of energy is called mode coupling.

Post-Processing Software 564

Measuring Polarization Mode Dispersion: Theory

In a long fiber, numerous mode-coupling events occur along the fiber

length, so that light emerging from the output end is the superposition of a
number of pulses with different delays. Nonetheless, it turns out that for
any given optical frequency, , one can always find two orthogonal input
principal states of polarization (PSPs) such that a light pulse with the same
input SOP as the input PSP, undergoes no spreading. For a single wave
plate, the PSPs are the two birefringent axes, whereas for a concatenation
of wave plates, neither the input nor the output PSPs correspond to the
alignment of the birefringent axes anywhere.
Contrary to the case of a wave plate, the DGD and PSPs of a long fiber are
dependent on wavelength and fluctuate in time as a result of
environmental variations such as temperature, external mechanical
constraints, etc. Their behavior is random, both as a function of wavelength
at a given time and as a function of time at a given wavelength. Fortunately,
this behavior can be characterized statistically. It can be demonstrated that
the probability density function of  is Maxwellian and, by definition, PMD
is its rms value, that is:

2
PMD = DGD

Note: PMD is sometimes defined as the mean value of the DGD, which for a
Maxwellian distribution yields a value 17 % lower than the rms definition.

If the average is calculated over , PMD is stable in time, provided that the
averaging window is sufficiently large (Dwdt >> 1).

565 FastReporter 3
 Measuring Polarization Mode Dispersion: Theory

It is essential to keep in mind that DGD fluctuates in time and can be either
smaller or larger than its rms value or PMD. This results in a statistical
probability that a pulse (information bit) is broadened, and leads to the
eventual impaired ability of the receiver to efficiently decode the
information. This adverse PMD effect makes it a critical phenomenon in
limiting transmission of high-bit-rate information.
In the case of PMD in a long fiber, there is a specific state called input PSP.
In this state, when the input SOP of the signal is aligned with one of its
axes, it will propagate through the fiber without any spreading or distortion
of the signal. This phenomenon is defined as this specific input SOP such
that the output SOP is independent of optical frequency. Again, the worst
case occurs when the signal is equally split between both input PSPs.
For long telecom fibers with random coupling of energy between modes
(that is. L >> h, where h is the coupling length), PMD grows as the square
root of the distance, whereas PMD of strong HiBi fiber (negligible mode
coupling) is directly proportional to the distance. Therefore, the PMD
coefficient for negligible mode coupling is expressed as ps/km, while
the PMD coefficient for random mode coupling is defined as ps/km1/2.

Post-Processing Software 566

D Keyboard Shortcuts
This section presents the available keyboard shortcuts to help you use
FastReporter 3 in a quick and efficient way.

To Press
Create a project Ctrl + N
Open a project Ctrl + Shift + O
Open a file Ctrl + O
Open a sample file Ctrl + F
Save selected files Ctrl + S
Save all files Ctrl + Shift + S
Cut Ctrl + X
Copy Ctrl + C
Paste Ctrl + V
Delete Del
Select all Ctrl + A
Invert selection Ctrl + I
Add event with marker A Ctrl + Insert
Add event with all markers Ctrl + S + Insert
Bring all markers in current view Ctrl + Q
Group selected items Ctrl + G

Post-Processing Software 568

Keyboard Shortcuts

To Press
Horizontal zoom controls. Ctrl + Alt
 Press Ctrl + Alt, then scroll the mouse wheel
forward or backward.
 Press Ctrl + Alt and drag the mouse over the
part of the graph that you want to magnify,
forming a rectangle. When you release the
mouse button, the new zoomed area
corresponds to the rectangle size and
position.

Note: If you press Ctrl + Alt but do not

select a rectangle size, the graph is
zoomed by a 2X factor.
Vertical zoom controls. Ctrl + Shift
 Press Ctrl + Shift, then scroll the mouse
wheel forward or backward.
 Press Ctrl + Shift and drag the mouse over
the part of the graph that you want to magnify,
forming a rectangle. When you release the
mouse button, the new zoomed area
corresponds to the rectangle size and
position.

Note: If you press Ctrl + Shift but do not

select a rectangle size, the graph is
zoomed by a 2X factor.

569 FastReporter 3
 Keyboard Shortcuts

To Press
Horizontal + vertical zoom controls. Ctrl
 Pres Ctrl, then scroll the mouse wheel
forward or backward.
 Press Ctrl and drag the mouse over the part of
the graph that you want to magnify, forming a
rectangle. When you release the mouse
button, the new zoomed area corresponds to
the rectangle size and position.

Note: If you press Ctrl but do not select a

rectangle size, the graph is zoomed
by a 2X factor.
Bring graph view to 100% Ctrl + Home
To switch between the graph view and the Ctrl + W
webpage view.

Post-Processing Software 570

 Index

Index
CD............................................................ 2
FIP............................................................ 2
2:N splitters............................................... 289 general..................................................... 1
iOLM ........................................................ 2
A OLTS......................................................... 2
A-B OPM and PPM .......................................... 2
LSA loss ............................................... 176 OTDR........................................................ 2
OTDR trace direction.............................. 47 PMD......................................................... 2
About window .......................................... 541 average loss measurement, OLTS............... 349
absolute
lengths, span positions ........................ 192 B
power unit........................................... 373 B-A
adding axis inverting, OTDR ............................. 169
elements automatically........................ 238 OTDR trace............................................. 47
elements, description........................... 263 basic PMD theory ...................................... 564
events automatically............................ 158 batch documentation, OTDR ..................... 207
files to project........................................ 47 bidirectional
advanced cable report, iOLM (Excel) ......... 475 extracting unidirectional files ............... 204
after-sales service ...................................... 541 iOLM files..................................... 219, 295
alignment, iOLM alignment....................... 217 loopback ................................................ 85
analysis range............................................ 408 OTDR files ............................................ 199
analyzing OTDR measurements............................ 198
bidirectional measurements, OTDR ...... 198 OTDR report ......................................... 467
measurements, iOLM........................... 277 project example ................................... 530
measurements, OTDR .......................... 188 unidirectional markers in file................ 205
appearance, modifying ............................... 27 browser for EXFO Connect ........................ 113
application-related reports ................ 438, 446
applying sorting to other windows ........... 506
attenuation, OTDR settings ....................... 140 C
auto correct, Validator .............................. 492 cable view.......................................... 134, 215
auto template ................................... 158, 238 caution
automated updates..................................... 24 of personal hazard ................................... 7
automatic loopback .............................. 68, 85 of product hazard .................................... 7
automatically CD
documenting measurement files ......... 519 analyzer, internal design ...................... 560
hiding panes.......................................... 27 available features ..................................... 2
matching files, OTDR ............................. 61 changing analysis range....................... 408
refreshing folder .................................... 65 changing fiber length .......................... 409
available features fiber type ............................................. 406

Post-Processing Software 572

Index

files supported..................................... 400 connecting to EXFO Connect..................... 110

options ................................................ 401 connections in link............................. 250, 347
switching between curve types............ 410 connector element .................................... 255
zero-dispersion wavelength ................. 411 contact information .................................. 541
certification stardards, iOLM ..................... 234 conventions, safety........................................ 7
changes, unsaved in project template ......... 50 coordinates for FIP file............................... 336
changing copying graph ........................................... 525
connections in link....................... 250, 347 core size, changing.................................... 195
core size .............................................. 195 correction factor, power meter.................. 390
direction, files ........................................ 54 coupler, element type................................ 256
display options ...................................... 34 creating
element matching tolerance ................ 220 bidirectional files.................................. 199
element type........................................ 266 iOLM bidirectional file.......................... 219
fiber length.......................................... 416 power meter configuration file ............ 391
iOLM fiber type.................................... 249 project from scratch............................... 43
main measurement, OTDR ................... 102 reports ......................................... 438, 453
measurement identification................. 495 Validator project .................................. 482
OLTS fiber type .................................... 346 credential validation .................................... 24
OTDR file format.................................. 208 Ctrl key ........................................................ 30
splices in link ............................... 251, 348 current threshold, changing ...................... 148
supported measurement types .............. 33 curve type, CD ........................................... 410
checking for updates................................... 24 custom
checking in files, EXFO Connect ........ 119, 124 element image ..................................... 271
checking out files, EXFO Connect ...... 119, 120 element type........................................ 256
chromatic dispersion elements .............................................. 269
coefficient............................................ 410 FasTesT thresholds ....................... 354, 381
factors ................................................. 563 identifiers, FIP ...................................... 334
managing ............................................ 563 identifiers, OLTS ................................... 345
theory .................................................. 560 thresholds ............................................ 229
clipboard................................................... 525 customizing
closing display ................................................... 27
files...................................................... 507 elements for multiple measurements... 257
panes..................................................... 27 main window......................................... 26
coefficient, dispersion ............................... 410
columns, EXFO Connect ............................ 117
compliance tool for jobs ........................... 482
D
data, validating ......................................... 482
composition, link....................................... 211
default template.......................................... 51
configuration files
deleting
FIP........................................................ 324
elements .............................................. 268
iOLM............................................ 282, 286
measurements or files from the list...... 525
OLTS .................................................... 344
template ................................................ 52
configuration sheet, Excel reports ............. 454

573 FastReporter 3
 Index

Validator template............................... 493 enabling

description, event types ............................ 542 2:N splitters ......................................... 289
details, elements and sections................... 253 bidirectional file creation ..................... 219
diagnostics end-of-fiber
iOLM.................................................... 294 event.................................................... 543
OLTS .................................................... 364 threshold ............................................. 188
direction, OTDR trace .................................. 47 Enterprise version, FastReporter .................... 1
discarding check out, EXFO Connect ......... 119 erasing element ......................................... 268
disconnected mode ..................................... 24 event types
display description ........................................... 542
modifying .............................................. 27 continuous fiber................................... 544
options ............................................ 27, 34 echo..................................................... 557
panes..................................................... 27 end of analysis ..................................... 545
distance, OTDR settings............................. 140 end of fiber .......................................... 543
documentation fiber section ......................................... 550
batch ................................................... 207 launch level.......................................... 549
measurement files ............................... 519 merged event....................................... 551
online .................................................. 540 non-reflective event ............................. 546
duplicated measurement tool ................... 523 positive event....................................... 548
dynamic reflective event..................................... 547
FasTesT thresholds ....................... 354, 381 reflective event (possible echo) ............ 558
iOLM thresholds .................................. 229 short fiber ............................................ 543
span end .............................................. 543
span start............................................. 543
E events........................................................ 173
editing
editing OTDR........................................ 166
iOLM element properties ..................... 266
macrobend tolerance ........................... 151
measurement identification................. 495
matching tolerances .................... 138, 154
OTDR event properties ......................... 166
modifying marker ................................ 181
elements
pulse matching tolerances ................... 157
adding ................................................. 263
table, options....................................... 165
aligning, iOLM ..................................... 217
zoom on splice..................................... 173
custom ................................................ 269
events, description of types ....................... 542
deleting ............................................... 268
examples
description........................................... 255
fiber characterization report ................ 530
details.......................................... 253, 257
project template .................................. 530
editing, iOLM....................................... 266
tasks .................................................... 530
group................................................... 258
Excel
matching tolerance.............................. 220
iOLM advanced cable report ................ 475
matching without a reference ............. 304
iOLM bidirectional report..................... 474
statistics....................................... 191, 305
iOLM plus FIP ....................................... 473
types.................................................... 266
OTDR advanced cable report................ 472

Post-Processing Software 574

Index

reports......................................... 439, 453 changing length........................... 409, 416

templates ............................................ 453 core size....................................... 195, 248
EXFO Connect type ..................................................... 406
browser ............................................... 113 view ..................................................... 216
checking in files ........................... 119, 124 fiber characterization
checking out files......................... 119, 120 exporting project ................................... 47
connection information ....................... 110 importing project................................... 45
discarding files..................................... 119 report example ............................ 469, 530
exporting files.............................. 119, 130 fiber inspection probe. see FIP
filters ................................................... 117 fiber type
log in ................................................... 111 iOLM .................................................... 249
log out................................................. 111 OLTS .................................................... 346
searching files...................................... 115 field of application selection........................ 32
undo check out files ............................ 122 files
uploading files............................. 119, 126 additional information......................... 497
viewing files................................. 119, 128 bidirectional, iOLM .............................. 295
existing element, launch/receive fibers ...... 275 changes unsaved ................................... 45
exporting changing direction................................. 54
EXFO Connect files....................... 119, 130 closing ................................................. 507
fiber characterization project................. 47 format.......... 136, 211, 310, 338, 372, 412
report templates.................................. 451 format, OTDR....................................... 208
Validator template............................... 489 matching rules ..................................... 138
extracting unidir. files from bidir. file ........ 204 matching, identifiers .............................. 57
measurements136, 211, 310, 338, 372, 412
opening ............................................... 507
F reference.............................................. 518
failed items, viewing ......................... 190, 277
renaming ............................................... 45
FasTesT
saving .................................................. 507
results.................................................. 359
sorting ................................................. 505
selecting thresholds..................... 354, 381
summary information .......................... 504
FastReporter
supported format ........ 136, 320, 338, 400
Enterprise ................................................ 1
Telcordia .............................................. 136
installing on a computer........................ 10
test settings, OTDR .............................. 197
installing on an EXFO platform.............. 11
filters
Plus.......................................................... 1
details .................................................. 454
Starter ..................................................... 1
EXFO Connect ...................................... 117
starting .................................................. 17
failed items .................................. 190, 277
Ultimate................................................... 1
FIP
uninstalling............................................ 11
application related report .................... 446
fault, element type.................................... 256
available features ..................................... 2
features for your product .............................. 1
cable connector view ........................... 326
fiber
configuration file, importing................ 324

575 FastReporter 3
 Index

custom identifiers ................................ 334 view, OTDR .......................................... 133

file formats .......................................... 320 zoom ................................................... 171
geolocation ......................................... 336 graphic
image .................................................. 325 display options, OTDR .......................... 169
legacy file format................................. 335 overlay, fiber inspection probe............. 325
multi-fiber view ................................... 326 group elements ......................................... 258
overlay ................................................. 325 grouped view .................................... 134, 215
plus iOLM report (Excel)....................... 473
reports......................................... 438, 470
results.................................................. 323
H
hiding
serial number....................................... 322
FIP results............................................. 323
thresholds............................................ 323
markers................................................ 177
unit model ........................................... 321
horizontal
fits
plus vertical zoom................................ 172
3-Term Sellmeier.................................. 563
zoom ................................................... 171
5-Term Sellmeier.................................. 563
html report ................................................ 439
cubic.................................................... 563
equations............................................. 561
lambda log lambda ............................. 563 I
linear ................................................... 563 identifiers
fixed custom for FIP...................................... 334
FasTesT thresholds ....................... 354, 381 custom for OLTS .................................. 345
iOLM thresholds .................................. 229 file matching.......................................... 57
license.................................................... 23 filtering ................................................ 514
flags .......................................................... 454 labels ................................................... 247
floating license ............................................ 23 image, custom element ............................. 271
folder auto refresh ...................................... 65 importing
formats, OTDR files ................................... 208 configuration file ......................... 324, 344
four-point event loss ................................. 176 fiber characterization project ................. 45
FTTx mode, iOLM....................................... 307 FIP file .................................................. 335
full graph zoom ........................................ 171 report template.................................... 448
Validator template ............................... 490
G information
FastReporter......................................... 541
generating
splitter ratio ......................................... 246
measurement reports .......................... 440
installing FastReporter
reports................................................. 438
computer ............................................... 10
summary reports ................................. 440
EXFO platform ....................................... 11
geolocation for FIP files ............................. 336
minimum requirements ........................... 9
global pass/fail status, OLTS ...................... 362
internet connection ..................................... 24
graph
inverting B-A dB axis, OTDR ....................... 169
space between traces .......................... 209
iOLM

Post-Processing Software 576

Index

advanced cable report (Excel) .............. 475 virtual bidirectional files....................... 302
analyzing measurements ..................... 277 IOR value by distance ................................ 194
application-related report.................... 446
auto template...................................... 238
available features..................................... 2
K
keyboard shortcuts.................................... 568
bidirectional files ................................. 295
bidirectional report (Excel)................... 474
cable view............................................ 215 L
certification standards ......................... 234 labels, identifier......................................... 247
changing number of connections ........ 250 language selection ...................................... 31
changing number of splices................. 251 launch fiber existing element .................... 275
configuration files ............................... 282 launching FastReporter................................ 17
configuration settings ......................... 286 legacy file format, FIP ................................ 335
customizing elements.......................... 257 length, OTDR settings................................ 140
diagnostics .......................................... 294 license, activating ........................................ 23
editing element properties .................. 266 linear view
element alignment .............................. 217 OTDR.................................................... 133
element or section details.................... 257 viewing section length ......................... 170
enabling bidirectional file creation ...... 219 link
extended element matching tolerance 220 grouped ....................................... 134, 215
fiber core size ...................................... 248 matching elements .............................. 304
fiber type ............................................. 249 view, iOLM ........................................... 211
fiber view............................................. 216 view, OLTS ........................................... 360
file formats .......................................... 211 local jobs ................................................... 420
FTTx mode ........................................... 307 local test.................................................... 420
group elements ................................... 258 locating FIP file on a map .......................... 336
identifier labels .................................... 247 locking markers ......................................... 174
link view .............................................. 211 log in, EXFO Connect................................. 111
matching elements, no reference ........ 304 log out, EXFO Connect .............................. 111
measurement statistics ................ 191, 305 loopback
multiple measurements ....................... 215 bidirectional........................................... 85
pass/fail thresholds .............................. 222 unidirectional......................................... 68
plus FIP report (Excel) .......................... 473 loss
report .................................................. 471 OTDR settings ...................................... 140
reports................................................. 438 statistics....................................... 191, 305
section length...................................... 304
selecting thresholds............................. 229
settings................................................ 243
M
SOR file................................................ 278 macrobends
splitter ratio......................................... 246 description........................................... 255
thresholds............................................ 229 identification........................................ 151
viewing multiple fibers ........................ 216 tolerances ............................................ 151

577 FastReporter 3
 Index

viewing ................................................ 153 saving files ........................................... 507

main measurement, OTDR......................... 102 sorting ................................................. 505
main window, customizing ......................... 26 statistics ............................................... 417
managing types ...................................................... 33
multiple measurements ....................... 215 measuring chromatic dispersion................ 560
projects.................................................. 43 menus, accessing......................................... 30
manual merging OLTS files..................................... 365
loopback.......................................... 68, 85 minimum requirements ................................. 9
matching of OTDR files .......................... 62 mismatch................................................... 255
measurement on OTDR markers .......... 176 model number, FIP .................................... 321
sorting of measurements..................... 505 modifying
zoom ................................................... 173 additional information on file .............. 497
markers application display ................................. 27
adding OTDR event...................... 177, 178 element type........................................ 266
hiding .................................................. 177 marker position.................................... 174
locking................................................. 174 measurement identification ................. 495
manual measurements, OTDR.............. 176 reports ................................................. 453
modifying position .............................. 181 summary information .......................... 504
OTDR ........................................... 169, 174 Validator template ............................... 489
retrieving position ............................... 183 monitors...................................................... 29
showing............................................... 177 moving
unidirectional from bidirectional ......... 205 items between monitors ........................ 29
zoom ................................................... 173 pane....................................................... 28
matched measurements, statistics..... 191, 305 multiple items, selecting.............................. 30
matching multiple measurements
identifiers for files.................................. 57 customizing elements .......................... 257
link elements ....................................... 304 managing ............................................ 215
OTDR files .................................. 55, 61, 62 viewing section length ......................... 304
tolerance, elements ............................. 220
measurements
analyzing ..................................... 188, 277
N
navigating the graph window, OTDR......... 171
auto documenting............................... 519
new element.............................................. 263
changing direction................................. 54
number, FIP ............................................... 321
copying graph ..................................... 525
duplicated ........................................... 523
editing identification ........................... 495 O
files.............. 136, 211, 310, 338, 372, 412 OLTS
merging............................................... 365 adding/removing wavelengths............. 339
OTDR bidirectional............................... 198 available features ..................................... 2
reference ..................................... 103, 518 average loss ......................................... 349
reports, generating.............................. 440 changing number of connections ........ 347
reports, overview ................................. 438 changing number of splices ................. 348

Post-Processing Software 578

Index

configuration file, importing ............... 344 bidirectional project example............... 530

custom identifiers ................................ 345 bidirectional, report ............................. 467
diagnostics .......................................... 364 cable view ............................................ 134
display unit for reference value............ 342 changing file format ............................ 208
FasTesT results ..................................... 359 changing main measurement .............. 102
FasTesT thresholds ....................... 354, 381 creating bidirectional files.................... 199
fiber type ............................................. 346 current measurement thresholds ......... 148
file formats .......................................... 338 editing event properties....................... 166
link view results ................................... 360 event matching tolerances........... 138, 154
loss calculation method....................... 349 event table view options...................... 165
merging files........................................ 365 event with one marker......................... 177
pass/fail status information ................. 362 fiber core size....................................... 195
reports................................................. 438 file formats .......................................... 136
results.................................................. 335 file test settings ................................... 197
settings................................................ 339 graph ................................................... 133
worse loss............................................ 349 graphic display options........................ 169
online help ................................................ 540 inverting B-A dB axis ............................ 169
opening IOR value by distance........................... 194
file ....................................................... 507 linear.................................................... 133
project ................................................... 44 macrobend tolerances ......................... 151
OPM marker position.................................... 183
available features..................................... 2 markers........................................ 169, 174
correction factor .................................. 390 markers, manual measurements .......... 176
settings................................................ 374 matching files ........................................ 55
optical tests possible ..................................... 1 matching files automatically .................. 61
options matching files manually ......................... 62
activating............................................... 23 modifying marker position................... 181
CD ....................................................... 401 outside spans....................................... 169
event table view, OTDR........................ 165 pass/fail thresholds ...................... 138, 145
PMD............................................. 314, 413 pulse baseline ...................................... 139
ORL thresholds .................................. 354, 381 pulse tolerance value ........................... 157
OTDR reports ......................................... 438, 468
absolute span positions ....................... 192 section length ...................................... 170
adding event with all markers ............. 178 settings ................................................ 138
advanced cable report (Excel) .............. 472 SOR file ................................................ 278
analyzing measurements ..................... 188 trace direction........................................ 47
application-related report.................... 446 viewing method................................... 135
apply reference as template................. 184 virtual bidirectional files....................... 207
auto template...................................... 158 zoom functions.................................... 171
available features..................................... 2 out of range element................................. 255
batch documentation .......................... 207 outside spans, OTDR.................................. 169
bidirectional measurements................. 198 overview, link ............................................ 211

579 FastReporter 3
 Index

P PPM-350D
panes creating configuration file.................... 391
auto-hiding............................................ 27 editing configuration file ..................... 395
closing ................................................... 27 viewing configuration file .................... 395
display ................................................... 27 predefined thresholds
moving .................................................. 28 FasTesT......................................... 354, 381
resizing .................................................. 27 iOLM .................................................... 229
pass/fail status information, OLTS ............. 362 priority, file matching .................................. 55
pass/fail thresholds projects
CD ....................................................... 401 adding files ............................................ 47
changing ............................. 145, 222, 374 creating.................................................. 43
OLTS .................................................... 339 default template .................................... 43
PMD............................................. 314, 413 exporting fiber characterization ............. 47
status................................................... 212 fiber characterization, importing ........... 45
PDF report ................................................. 439 opening ................................................. 44
Plus version, FastReporter ............................. 1 properties .............................................. 49
PMD removing files ........................................ 48
available features..................................... 2 saving .................................................... 45
changing fiber length .......................... 416 template example ................................ 530
file formats .................................. 310, 412 template name....................................... 53
options ........................................ 314, 413 template unavailable.............................. 51
statistics............................................... 417 templates............................................... 50
theory .................................................. 564 templates, set as default ........................ 51
PON network splitters ............................... 290 properties, general ...................................... 49
position pulse baseline, OTDR ................................. 139
of markers in OTDR file ........................ 183 pulse, selecting.......................................... 157
statistics....................................... 191, 305
possible optical tests ..................................... 1 Q
power meter quick selection of items ............................. 525
changing unit. ..................................... 373
correction factor .................................. 390
creating configuration file ................... 391 R
editing configuration........................... 395 range, analysis........................................... 408
results.......................................... 295, 335 ratio, unbalanced splitters ......................... 290
viewing configuration.......................... 395 receive fiber existing element .................... 275
power unit, changing................................ 373 reference
PPM as a template, OTDR ............................ 184
available features..................................... 2 measurement....................................... 103
correction factor .................................. 390 setting file............................................ 518
file formats .......................................... 372 setting measurement ........................... 518
settings................................................ 374 unit, OLTS ............................................ 342
reflectance

Post-Processing Software 580

Index

OTDR settings ...................................... 140 S

zoom ................................................... 173 safety
reflection statistics ............................ 191, 305 caution .................................................... 7
refreshing folders ........................................ 65 conventions ............................................. 7
removing warning ................................................... 7
element ............................................... 268 saving
elements automatically........................ 238 measurement files................................ 507
events automatically............................ 158 OTDR file in a different format............. 208
files from project ................................... 48 searching files, EXFO Connect ................... 115
template ................................................ 52 section details
renaming template...................................... 52 customizing ......................................... 257
reports viewing ........................................ 253, 257
application-related .............................. 446 section length
bidirectional OTDR............................... 467 linear view ........................................... 170
creating ............................................... 453 multiple measurements ....................... 304
exporting templates ............................ 451 sections
fiber characterization........................... 469 editing element properties................... 266
FIP........................................................ 470 editing event properties....................... 166
formats................................................ 439 statistics....................................... 191, 305
importing template ............................. 448 selected event, zoom................................. 172
iOLM.................................................... 471 selecting
iOLM advanced cable report (Excel) ..... 475 FasTesT thresholds ....................... 354, 381
iOLM bidirectional (Excel) .................... 474 field of application................................. 32
iOLM plus FIP (Excel)............................ 473 language................................................ 31
measurement....................................... 438 multiple items ........................................ 30
modifying ............................................ 453 similar items......................................... 525
OTDR ................................................... 468 thresholds ............................................ 229
OTDR advanced cable (Excel) ............... 472 Validator template ............................... 490
summary.............................................. 438 serial number, FIP ...................................... 322
requirements for installing FastReporter 3 .... 9 server for EXFO connect ............................ 110
resizing panes ............................................. 27 settings
results application............................................. 12
FasTesT ................................................ 359 CD........................................................ 401
iOLM.................................................... 243 configuration ....................................... 286
link view .............................................. 360 display ................................................... 27
OLTS .................................................... 335 OLTS .................................................... 339
power meter................................ 295, 335 OPM/PPM............................................. 374
reverting to file test settings ..................... 197 OTDR.................................................... 138
ribbon, displaying ....................................... 27 OTDR file tests...................................... 197
right-clicking in menus................................ 30 PMD............................................. 314, 413
running Validator job ................................ 491 sheet

581 FastReporter 3
 Index

details.................................................. 454 measurement types................................ 33

universal .............................................. 465 switch, element type ................................. 256
Shift key ...................................................... 30 symbols, safety .............................................. 7
shortcuts, keyboard................................... 568
show lambda zero..................................... 411
showing
T
table, wavelength...................................... 405
FIP results ............................................ 323
tabs
markers................................................ 177
auto-hiding ............................................ 27
software customization wizard ................... 12
moving................................................... 28
SOR file ..................................................... 278
technical support....................................... 541
sorting
Telcordia files............................................. 136
files...................................................... 506
templates
measurements ..................................... 505
Excel..................................................... 453
space between traces ................................ 209
exporting ............................................. 451
span end
name in title bar .................................... 53
description........................................... 543
OTDR file as reference .......................... 184
excluded .............................................. 147
project ................................................... 50
span positions, absolute lengths ............... 192
project, set as default ............................ 51
span start
removing ............................................... 52
description........................................... 543
renaming ............................................... 52
excluded .............................................. 147
report................................................... 448
splice
unavailable............................................. 51
description........................................... 255
TestFlow
in link........................................... 251, 348
working with no connection .................. 24
zoom ................................................... 173
tests you can perform.................................... 1
splitters
theory
2:N....................................................... 289
chromatic dispersion............................ 560
description........................................... 255
polarization mode dispersion............... 564
in iOLM files......................................... 307
three-point reflectance .............................. 176
ratio information ................................. 246
thresholds
unbalanced.......................................... 290
CD........................................................ 401
Starter version, FastReporter ......................... 1
FasTesT......................................... 354, 381
starting FastReporter................................... 17
iOLM .................................................... 229
statistic measurements, PMD .................... 417
not applied .......................................... 147
statistics, matched measurements..... 191, 305
OLTS..................................................... 339
summary information for files................... 504
OTDR.................................................... 138
summary reports
pass/fail, iOLM ..................................... 222
description........................................... 438
pass/fail, OTDR ..................................... 145
generating ........................................... 440
PMD............................................. 314, 413
overview .............................................. 438
value for current measurement............ 148
supported
time setting ................................................. 34
file formats .. 136, 211, 320, 338, 372, 400

Post-Processing Software 582

Index

title bar, project name................................. 53 vertical zoom............................................. 172

tolerances viewing
OTDR event matching .......................... 138 EXFO Connect files....................... 119, 128
OTDR event matching pulse................. 157 failed items .................................. 190, 277
tool for duplicated measurements ............ 523 macrobends ......................................... 153
traces, spacing .......................................... 209 method, OTDR ..................................... 135
tree view ................................................... 514 multiple iOLM fibers ............................ 216
two-point section attenuation .................. 176 OLTS results ......................................... 335
type of element, changing ........................ 266 online help........................................... 540
types of measurements supported .............. 33 power meter results ..................... 295, 335
section length .............................. 170, 304
Validator template ............................... 489
U views
Ultimate version, FastReporter ...................... 1
cable ............................................ 134, 215
unbalanced splitters .................................. 290
fiber ..................................................... 216
undoing check out, EXFO Connect ............ 122
identifiers............................................. 514
unidirectional
link....................................................... 211
files from bidirectional file ................... 204
section length ...................................... 170
loopback................................................ 68
virtual bidirectional files
marker from bidirectional file .............. 205
iOLM .................................................... 302
uninstalling FastReporter............................. 11
OTDR.................................................... 207
universal sheet .......................................... 465
unsaved changes......................................... 45
Update Manager ........................................... 9 W
updates, automated.................................... 24 wavelength
uploading files, EXFO Connect .......... 119, 126 adding and removing .......................... 339
user guide ................................................. 540 adding to OLTS project ........................ 339
user interface language............................... 31 OTDR main measurement .................... 102
table .................................................... 405
windows
V display ................................................... 27
validating file compliance.......................... 491
sorting ................................................. 506
Validator
working with two monitors......................... 29
auto correct ......................................... 492
worse loss measurement, OLTS ................. 349
creating project ................................... 482
deleting template ................................ 493
exporting template .............................. 489 Y
importing template ............................. 490 Y spacing................................................... 209
modifying template ............................. 489
running validation job ......................... 491
selecting template ............................... 490
Z
zero-dispersion wavelength
tool...................................................... 482
CD........................................................ 411
viewing template................................. 489

583 FastReporter 3
 Index

definition ............................................. 563

zoom
event reflectance ................................. 173
event splice.......................................... 173
four markers ........................................ 173
full graph............................................. 171
horizontal ............................................ 171
horizontal plus vertical ........................ 172
manual ................................................ 173
OTDR functions.................................... 171
selected event...................................... 172
undo.................................................... 173
vertical................................................. 172

Post-Processing Software 584

P/N: 26.0.1.1

www.EXFO.com · [email protected]

CORPORATE HEADQUARTERS 400 Godin Avenue Quebec (Quebec) G1M 2K2 CANADA
Tel.: 1 418 683-0211 · Fax: 1 418 683-2170

TOLL-FREE (USA and Canada) 1 800 663-3936

© 2023 EXFO Inc. All rights reserved.

Printed in Canada (2023-09)

